JP2021000560A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of continuously executing a performance for inspiring a player with a predetermined feeling of hope in various modes.SOLUTION: When start winning is detected, start permission of a continuous notice performance is determined, based on whether a counter acquired by the start winning indicates a jackpot. In this case, it is estimated that a Pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state at a point of time when a jackpot lottery of a variable performance corresponding to the start winning is held by variation start processing, and jackpot determination is simply executed using a simple high-probability time big winning random number table 202c when the Pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state at a point of time of the start permission determination of the continuous notice performance. Thus, when variation start and the start winning are detected by one timer interruption processing while the Pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state, the jackpot lottery accompanying the variation start and the start permission determination of the continuous notice performance accompanying the start winning can be completed before start of the next timer interruption processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 18

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects are displayed on display devices such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of games. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (wins) a ball at the entry port (starting opening). For example, three horizontal or vertical balls in the effective display area, or a total of 3 × 3 squares. Nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It causes a hit in some cases.

In addition, while scrolling a symbol or the like, there is a higher probability than usual in a game state (for example, a hit) that is advantageous to the player, and an interesting effect (for example, an effect by reach display) that suggests in advance. Is carried out, and a device is made to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous game. The effect of the reach display is, for example, to stop the symbol rows of the left and right two rows of the three rows of symbols being scrolled at a predetermined symbol, and then scroll the symbol row of the middle one row at a low speed. On the other hand, it is an effect that gives a feeling of expectation to stop with a predetermined combination of stop symbols. The effect of the reach display is performed for a longer time than the normal variable effect (variable effect without the reach display) in order to give the player a higher expectation.
By the way, as a pattern of hobby production, a gaming machine that suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state by continuously executing a transition to an advantageous gaming state over a plurality of variable productions (hereinafter referred to as "continuous notice production") is also known. There is.

Jikkenhei 7-24383 Gazette

However, the conventional game machine that performs continuous advance notice production has a problem that the interest in stopping the symbol in the variable production is low.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in stopping identification information in dynamic display of identification information. ..

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition and an acquisition means for acquiring information when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. And between the main control means having the selection means for selecting the type of dynamic display of the identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means and the dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means. The main display means whose display is controlled by the main control means, and the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the type of dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. When a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, which is provided with an auxiliary control means having a dynamic display execution means for executing the display. , Gives a predetermined game value to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, a detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition, an acquisition means for acquiring information when the establishment of the start condition is detected by the detection means, and an acquisition means for acquiring the information. Display control by the main control means between a main control means having a selection means for selecting a type of dynamic display of identification information based on the obtained information and dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means. Dynamic display that executes dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the type of dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main display means and the main control means. When a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, which is provided with a sub-control means having an execution means, a predetermined game is given to the player. Give value.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is explanatory drawing explaining the bit structure of the hold count command. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the continuous notice determination table. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the continuous notice mode flag. It is explanatory drawing explaining the kind of effect mode of the variation effect which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. It is a timing chart of a normal normal reach variation mode and a pseudo variation effect effect mode sorted from the normal reach variation mode. It is a timing chart of a normal super reach variation mode and a pseudo variation effect effect mode sorted from the super reach variation mode. It is a timing chart of a normal special reach variation mode and a pseudo variation effect effect mode sorted from the special reach variation mode. (A) is a timing chart of the "2-second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2-second re-variation" mode performed by the third symbol display device 81, and (b) is a "2-second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2-second re-variation" mode. (C) is a timing chart of the mode of "2 seconds shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation". It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the probability change setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice determination processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous notice setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp matching apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the external interrupt processing executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variable distribution processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variable distribution processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 in one embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a rear view of.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the effect pattern of the variation display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the effect content at the time of reach effect is changed. Be manipulated.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided. Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are performed when there is a start winning prize (when the ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64) as a stop symbol after the fluctuation is completed or whether or not the ball is changing is indicated by the lighting state. The symbol according to the lottery result (first probability variation jackpot, second probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, or loss) is shown by the lighting state, and the number of holdings is shown by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

The above-mentioned "first probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and is referred to as "second probability variation jackpot". Is a probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. Further, the "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). ..

Here, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, it is easy to shift to the special gaming state. It is the state of the game. Further, the high probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first ball entrance It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters the 64. Instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, the time during which the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first ball entry port 64 is opened or once, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory is opened by hitting may be changed.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) that variablely displays the third symbol triggered by winning a prize in the first ball opening 64. And a second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the second entry port 67 is provided.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. To. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-symbol formed smaller than the main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets, which are almost full on the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is displayed. It is configured to generate a jackpot after it is over. When shifting to the high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high-probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. Therefore, a total of 20 third symbols, 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols, are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in 3 rows × 3 rows. Five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set in the main display area Dm. Then, in each game, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, the combination of jackpot symbols on one of the effective lines (same in this embodiment). If you align with the combination of the main symbols of), the jackpot movie will be displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-door opaque door 87 that is electrically opened and closed by a door solenoid 87a (see FIG. 5), and the door solenoid 87a is sometimes excited to excite the door. Since the 87 is opened to the front side, it is a display area that can be visually recognized by the player. The notice area Ds2 in the center is a display area that can always be visually recognized without being covered by the door.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the left and right doors 87 are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are obscured so that the display screen cannot be visually recognized. When one or both of the left and right doors 87 are opened during the variable display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is in a state where the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. It is suggested. In the central notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears. A notice will be produced by issuing it. In principle, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds, but the third symbol, characters, and the like are displayed larger across the respective display areas Dm and Ds. Display effects can be performed. In addition, as one aspect of the advance notice effect, a variable display of the third symbol is performed in the sub display area Ds, and one scene of the drama, a promotion video of music, or the like is displayed in the main display area Dm to the player. It can also be suggested that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual.

Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 before the stop symbol (one of the probability variation jackpot symbol, the time saving jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball has been entered is held up to four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. Four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 85, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to 4 times, and 3 times or less. Alternatively, it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of hold times of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not be used to display the lighting.

The second symbol display device 83 fluctuates by alternately lighting the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. When the display is performed and the variable display is stopped at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be in the operating state (open) for a predetermined time. There is. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of times the ball is held is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81. The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of times of holding of the second ball opening 67 is not limited to four, as in the case of the first ball opening 64, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example,). It may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is performed by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes processing such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 22), and the updated value is RAM 203. It is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of. The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has access to the first entry port 64. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored according to the winning timing of the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), reaches a maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. Stored in. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number tables 202a and 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is the jackpot random number table 202a. , 202b, if it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, it is determined to be the jackpot. The jackpot random number tables 202a and 202b are a low-probability time jackpot random number table 202a for a low probability time (a period during a probability change) and a high probability for a high probability time (during probability change) in which a jackpot is higher than a low probability time. It is divided into two types, the hourly jackpot random number table 202b, and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability time and the high probability time. Whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability is set by a probability changing flag 203b provided in the RAM 203, which will be described later.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 9), and the maximum value (for example, for example). In the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 9, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 9). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64. Stored in the area.

Therefore, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The corresponding display mode is the one at the time of disconnection.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area is a big hit, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit. It becomes. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same reserved ball storage area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values that become big hits at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 30, and the values are "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448". , 486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”are stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b.

In the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the value of the jackpot random number stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b are duplicated. The value of each big hit random number is set so that it does not become the value. This is because if there is a value that is always used regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10 as the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, that value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. As in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability or a low probability), the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot can be changed. Since it can be difficult to predict, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 9. In this first hit type counter C2, when the random number value is "6,7,8,9", the jackpot type is "15R probability change" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. The jackpot type is "big hit" (first probability variation jackpot), while the jackpot type when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "4,5" has a high probability after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a "2R probability variation jackpot" (second probability variation jackpot) that shifts to the state, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0, 1, 2, 3", the jackpot type is the maximum round. It is a "time-saving jackpot" in which the number shifts to a low-probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened for 100 fluctuations.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, three types of hit types (first probability variation jackpot, second probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. It is configured to.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops. "Reach outside the front and back" (for example, in the range of 98,99), and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns are selected with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64, the value of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 203 is reached. It is stored.

Further, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values for which the stop pattern is selected are provided in the ROM 202 corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop pattern is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state based on the probability changing flag 203b described later.

For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is more likely to be selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" or "reach other than the front and rear". In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than front-back deviation" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than front-back deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed by the third display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 22).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the main control device 110 will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 6, the ROM 202 has a low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and a high-probability jackpot random number table 202b that set the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot among the values indicated by the first random number counter C1. have. Further, the ROM 202 is provided with a simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c.

As described above, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a sets the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot in the first hit random number counter C1 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state (that is, it is not in the probability change). It's a table. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, whereas the number of random number values that become a big hit at low probability is 3, and the value "7,307,582". Is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability. Therefore, the jackpot probability at the time of low probability is set to 1/300.

Further, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b is a table for setting the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot in the first hit random number counter C1 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state (that is, during the probability change). .. In the present embodiment, the value of the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, whereas the number of random number values that become a big hit at high probability is 30, and the value "28,58,85". , 122, 144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836 , 866, 892 ”is stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b. Therefore, the jackpot probability at the time of high probability is set to 1/30.

On the other hand, the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c shows a part of the random number values that are jackpots in the first hit random number counter C1 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state (that is, the probability is changing). Is a table that stores the values of. That is, among the values of 30 random numbers stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, some values are stored in the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the number of random number values stored in the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is 10, and the value "28,122,213,298,390,486,567,656,750,836" is , It is stored in the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c.

The low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b are of the variation start process (see FIG. 17) that controls the start of the variation effect executed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot lottery is performed with reference to (see S301 to S304 in FIG. 17). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (that is, it is not in the probability change), it is stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area and the value of the big hit random number set by the low probability big hit random number table 202a. The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared, and if those values match, it is determined as a big hit. When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (that is, in a probabilistic change), it is stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area and the value of the big hit random number set by the high probability big hit random number table 202b. The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared, and if those values match, it is determined as a big hit. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the jackpot is 1/300, and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the jackpot is 1/30.

Further, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, and the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c detect the winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the processing associated with the starting winning. Is referred to in the start winning process (see FIG. 18) for executing the above, and it is determined whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the continuous advance notice effect is a kind of advance notice effect that suggests (notices) that the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 is likely to be a big hit, and the winning is given. This is an effect in which the same third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect over all the variation effects that are sometimes reserved. If this continuous advance notice effect is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the pending variation effect, the player is expected to become a big hit after all the reserved variation effects are completed. Can be held against.

In the present embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect is a combination of predetermined third symbols (for example, shown in FIG. 4) as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect (variation display) is completed in the third symbol display device 81. This is performed by displaying a so-called "chance eye" in which the combination of the main symbols on the middle line L2 is "3", "4", "1") in order from the left symbol row Z1. Normally, the player pays attention to the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game. Therefore, by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol appearing after the stop of the variation effect. , It is possible to make the player easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed. In addition, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as a stop symbol and the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), or the time saving jackpot does not appear, a chance eye appears. By giving it out, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be obtained after the end of the continuous advance notice production, and it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game.

The determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 is determined every time the ball is won by the main control device 110 to the first ball entry port 64 and the hold count counter 203a is added by 1. It is done in. That is, when the start winning process (see FIG. 18) performed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 detects the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the hold count counter 203a is incremented by 1, it follows. Then, it is determined whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, various counters (random number counter C1 per first, type counter C2 per first) acquired when the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 is detected to determine the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect. , The stop pattern selection counter C3) is performed according to the value. Specifically, when the first hit random number counter C1 shows a jackpot and the first hit type counter C2 shows "15R probability variation jackpot", and when the first hit random number counter C1 shows a miss and the stop pattern selection counter C3 When indicates "front-back deviation reach", a determination is made to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the jackpot is the most advantageous gaming state for the player (15R probability variation jackpot), or even if it is off, the reach (front and back) that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot. Since the start of the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 is permitted only in the case of the out-of-reach), when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player is highly expected. You can give a feeling.

In this way, in the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect, whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired with the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 is a big hit. (See S405 to S410 in FIG. 18). In the determination of the jackpot, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball opening 64 is performed in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 17). (That is, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination, which will be described later, is off), the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability and the acquired first hit random number counter. The values of C1 are compared, and if those values match, it is determined as a big hit.

In addition, "the time when the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball opening 64 is performed in the variable start processing" is reserved with the winning of the first ball opening 64 by the starting winning process. The first random number counter C1 (see S404 in FIG. 18) stored in the empty hold area of the ball storage area is shifted to the execution area as the hold ball is consumed (see S205 in FIG. 16), and a big hit lottery is performed in the fluctuation start process. (See S304 in FIG. 17), and by estimating the gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of this big hit lottery, the continuous advance notice effect is produced. At the time of the jackpot determination in the start permission determination, the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation start processing can be estimated. Therefore, the jackpot determination in the start permission determination of the continuous notice effect can be performed based on the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation start processing, and at the time of the jackpot determination, the jackpot lottery result of the fluctuation start processing can be obtained. Can be predicted. Therefore, the determination as to whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect is made based on the jackpot lottery result of the predicted fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball opening 64 is performed in the fluctuation start processing (that is, the continuous notice described later). If the probability change during determination flag 203c is on), whether or not the pachinko machine 10 at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect is undergoing probability change instead of simply using the high probability jackpot random number table 202b. The jackpot random number table used for determining the jackpot is selected from the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b and the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c according to the probability (that is, according to the value of the probability changing flag 203b described later).

That is, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball opening 64 is performed in the fluctuation start processing (during the probability change for continuous notice determination described later). If the flag 203c is on) and the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect (the probabilistic change flag 203b described later is off and is not in the probability change), it is high. When the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the probability-time jackpot random number table 202b is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, and those values match. It is judged as a big hit. On the other hand, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the winning of the first ball opening 64 is performed in the fluctuation start processing (during the probability change for continuous notice determination described later). If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (the probabilistic change flag 203b, which will be described later, is on and is in the probabilistic change) at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect (the flag 203c is on), it is simple. The value of the random number stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, and when those values match, the jackpot Is determined.

Here, the reason for using the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c in the jackpot determination accompanying the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect, and its effect will be described. The fluctuation start process (see S206 and FIG. 17 in FIG. 16) in which a jackpot lottery or the like is performed is a variation process (see S104 and FIG. 16 in FIG. 15) which is a process of timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds. It is done in. Further, the start winning process (see S105 and FIG. 18 in FIG. 15) in which it is determined whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect is also executed in the timer interrupt process. In this way, the timer interrupt process includes a variation start process and a start winning process, and in one timer interrupt process, the start of the variation effect and the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64. If both are detected, both the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation start process and the permission determination of the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process will be executed.

In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (so-called probabilistic change), the hit probability of the second symbol is also increased so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. Further, in the high probability state, since the fluctuation time is generally set short in order to consume the reserved ball on which the fluctuation effect is held in a short time, the start timing of the fluctuation effect increases. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), there is an opportunity to detect both the start of the fluctuation effect and the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 in one timer interrupt process. Will occur more frequently than in the normal state, and in the timer interrupt processing, there is a possibility that both the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation start processing and the permission determination of the start of the continuous notice effect in the start winning processing will be executed. Will be higher.

When the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (probability change), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area and the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability are displayed. Since each of the stored 30 random number values is compared, the lottery process takes a long time. Further, when the result of the lottery is out of order, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and one final stop symbol before and after the reach symbol are generated after the reach is generated, as the process of subsequently determining the stop pattern at the time of the outlier. Compare the value of the random number that becomes "reach out of front and back" that stops only by the difference, and the value of the random number that becomes "reach other than out of front and back" that the final stop symbol stops outside before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Processing is performed, and further processing takes time. In addition, since the MPU 201 provided in the main control device 110 usually uses an 8-bit MPU in order to facilitate the test of the pachinko machine 10, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a 2-byte counter. It takes a lot of processing time to compare.

On the other hand, even in the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect performed in the start winning process, the value of the counter C1 per first random number acquired by entering the ball into the first entry port 64 has a high probability. Compared with each of the values of 30 random numbers stored in the hourly jackpot random number table 202b, a lot of processing time is required for the processing as in the jackpot lottery. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability change), a lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed in accordance with the start of the fluctuation effect in one timer interrupt process, and further, the first ball entry port is performed. The determination process of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the winning of the ball to 64 (starting winning) is the value of the counter C1 per first random number and the 30 random numbers stored in the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability. When it is performed by comparing each value of, the processing time is the interval (for example, 2 milliseconds) in which the timer interrupt processing is executed in the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect. The number of timer interrupts, that is, the jackpot lottery, which is an important process in the pachinko machine 10, may not be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a prize (starting prize) to the first ball opening 64 detected by the starting winning process is detected, a variable effect corresponding to the starting winning is performed. It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state when the jackpot lottery is performed in the fluctuation start process (that is, the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination described later is on), and the continuous notice effect is started. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time of the permission determination (that is, if the probability change flag 203b described later is on and the probability change is in progress), the number of 10 stored in the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c By comparing each random number value with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the start winning, the jackpot judgment is simply performed, and the permission judgment for the start of the continuous notice effect is made based on the judgment result. It is configured to do so (see S408 in FIG. 18).

As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), a big hit lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed in accordance with the start of the fluctuation effect in one timer interrupt process, and further, one of them. In the timer interrupt process, even if the determination process of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is performed, the continuous advance notice effect is displayed. In the determination of whether or not to allow the start, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired by the start winning is compared with each of the values of 10 random numbers stored in the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c. Therefore, the processing time can be shortened. Therefore, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process, which is particularly important in the pachinko machine 10. A jackpot lottery can be completed within the time allotted for the timer interrupt process.

Since the simple high-probability big hit random number table 202c stores a part of the random number values that become big hits in the first hit random number counter C1, as in the present embodiment, the simple high-probability time big hit random number table 202c is stored. When the jackpot is determined using the jackpot random number table 202c, it is not possible to determine all the jackpots from the first hit random number counter C1 acquired with the start winning. However, the result of the jackpot determination here is only used for the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Then, in the present embodiment, even if the first hit random number counter C1 which is supposed to be a big hit is determined to be "off", it is determined that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not permitted based on the determination result of the "off". As a result, the appearance probability of the continuous advance notice effect is only reduced, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not affected at all. On the contrary, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (during probability change), the player is playing with the expectation that the player will eventually win the jackpot. If it is displayed with the same appearance probability as, the continuous notice effect will be displayed frequently, which may make the player feel annoyed, but the continuous notice is made using the simple probability jackpot random number table 202c. If the permission for the start of the effect is determined, the probability of appearance of the continuous notice effect is reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling annoyed.

Further, by adjusting the number of random numbers that become jackpots stored in the jackpot random number table 202c at the time of simple probability, the appearance probability of the continuous advance notice effect can be adjusted, so that the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted. It can be easily changed according to the characteristics.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a winning (starting winning) to the first ball opening 64 detected by the starting winning process is detected, the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the starting winning is changed to the variable start process. It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, the probability changing probabilistic change flag 203c for continuous notice determination, which will be described later, is on), and the pachinko machine is at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous notice effect. If 10 is in a low probability state (that is, the probability change flag 203b described later is off and is not in probability change), the value of each of the 30 random numbers stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202b is started. It is configured to determine the jackpot by comparing it with the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by winning, and to determine the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect based on the determination result (FIG. 18). See S409).

In this case, in the one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed with the start of the fluctuation effect, and further, in the one timer interrupt process, the first ball entry port 64 is entered. Even if the determination process of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the winning of the ball (starting winning) is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, so that it is stored in the execution area in the jackpot lottery. Only the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the value of each of the three random numbers stored in the low probability big hit random number table 202a. Therefore, in determining whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the start winning and the value of 30 random numbers stored in the high probability jackpot random number table 202b are one. Even if the jackpot judgment accompanying the permission judgment for the start of the continuous notice production is strictly performed in comparison with each one, the next timer interrupt processing is performed for the jackpot lottery and the permission judgment for the start of the continuous notice production. It can be completed by the start of the process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a winning (starting winning) to the first ball opening 64 detected by the starting winning process is detected, the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the starting winning is changed to the variable start process. If it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the pachinko machine 10 is performed (that is, if the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination described later is off), as described above, the start permission of the continuous notice effect is permitted. Regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state at the time of judgment, each of the three random numbers stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the first hit obtained by the start winning prize. The jackpot is determined by comparing with the value of the random number counter C1, and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the determination result (see S405 in FIG. 18).

As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, and is stored in the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability in one timer interrupt process. Even if comparisons are made with each of the 30 random values, if the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect is further determined in the timer interrupt process, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is started. Since the permission determination is only a comparison processing of the first hit random number counter C1 using the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability, the timer interrupt processing in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect are performed is performed next. It can be completed by the start of the timer interrupt process. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, the jackpot lottery can be surely performed in a shorter time than when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. Similarly, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b determine the jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the start of the variable effect and the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect performed with the start winning. Both of them are configured to be referred to. As a result, it is not necessary to provide separate jackpot random number tables for the jackpot lottery accompanying the start of the variable effect and the jackpot determination in the determination of permission to start the continuous advance notice effect, so that an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be suppressed. ..

Next, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. It has an area (work area). It is provided in a counter buffer for storing the counter and the like described with reference to FIG. 7, a holding ball storage area, and a work area of the RAM 203. Further, the work area of the RAM 203 has a hold count counter 203a, a probability changing flag 203b, and a probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 22) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 21) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The hold count counter 203a holds the hold count (wait count number) of the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64. ) Is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the hold count counter 203a is set to zero, and each time a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 and the number of hold of the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S403 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the hold count counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation display based on the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64 is executed (see S204 of FIG. 16).

The addition / subtraction of the hold count counter 203a is performed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. That is, every time the timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201, the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 15) is executed, and it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (see S105 in FIG. 15). See S401 in FIG. 18). Then, when it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the first ball entry port 64 (S401: Yes in FIG. 18), the hold count counter 203a is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 (see S403 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, every time the timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201, the variable process (see S104 in FIG. 15) is executed. Then, in the fluctuation processing, when it is determined that the state of the game machine is neither a big hit nor a fluctuation and there is a reserved fluctuation display, the fluctuation start processing (see S206 in FIG. 16) is performed to the first ball entrance 64. The variation display based on the winning of the ball is executed, and the hold count counter 203a is decremented by 1 (see S204 in FIG. 16).

The value of the hold count counter 203a (that is, the hold count) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold count command (see S421 in FIG. 18). The hold count command is 2 bytes (16 bits) transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a ball is awarded to the first entry port 64 and the hold count counter 203a is incremented by 1. ) Configuration command. The voice lamp control device 113 lights the hold lamps 85 as many times as the number of hold lamps 85 based on the value of the hold count counter 203a notified by the hold count command.

Here, the configuration of the hold count command will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a bit configuration of the hold count command. In the following description, among the 2-byte commands, the upper byte is referred to as a higher byte, and the lower byte is referred to as a lower byte. Further, in each byte, the most significant bit (MSB) is defined as the “7th bit” and the least significant bit (LSB) is defined as the “0th bit”.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the hold count command, the 7th to 4th bits of the high-order byte are composed of a fixed value "0111" (binary number), whereby this command is a hold count command. Show that. The voice lamp control device 113 confirms the value of the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte among the commands received from the main control device 110, and receives the command when the value is "0111" (binary number). It can be recognized that the executed command is a hold count command (see S1007 in FIG. 25).

In addition, among the hold count commands, the lower byte is composed of the hold count. When the main control device 110 transmits the hold count command to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the hold count counter 203a added by 1 due to the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64 is set to a lower level of the hold count command. It is applied to the 2nd to 0th bits of the byte. Further, 0 is set in all the 7th to 3rd bits of the lower byte of the hold count command. Thereby, the entire lower byte of the hold count command can represent the hold count of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the hold count of the variation effect (variation display) held by the main control device 110 from the lower bytes of the received hold count command. The value is stored in the hold count counter 23a of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1008 in FIG. 25). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 is the hold count itself of the variation effect held by the main control device 110 by the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the hold count counter 203a is added by 1. You can get the value. As a result, the number of hold times of the variable effect managed by the hold count counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of hold of the variable effect held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even in this case, the deviation can be corrected by the hold count command received next.

On the other hand, the hold count command also plays a role as a continuous advance notice permission command instructing the voice lamp control device 113 whether or not to permit the start of the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 is performed by the start winning process (see FIG. 18) performed in the timer interrupt process, and the first ball opening 64 This is performed every time the ball is won and the hold count counter 203a is added by 1. That is, the addition of the hold count counter 203a and the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 are executed at the same timing. Therefore, by including the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count) and the determination result of the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect in one hold count command and transmitting the command, the command transmission count can be reduced and the processing can be performed. The increase in burden can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the role of the hold count command as the continuous notice permission command is the continuous notice permission flag represented by the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command and the continuous notice represented by the 0th bit of the upper byte. This is done by the post-game status flag. The continuous notice permission flag indicates whether or not to allow the start of the continuous notice effect (that is, the chance eye) in the third symbol display device 81, and when the value is "1", the third symbol display device It means that the start of the continuous notice effect in 81 is permitted, and when it is "0", it means that the start of the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 is not permitted. Further, the game status flag after the continuous advance notice is based on the value of various counters acquired at the time of winning the ball to the first entry port 64, which is the transmission trigger of the hold count command, in the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. A flag indicating whether the determined game state) is "big hit" or "missing". When the value is "1", it means "big hit", and when it is "0", it means "big hit". Indicates that it is "off".

The continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after the continuous notice are set based on the determination result of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous notice effect. That is, whether to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect based on the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired by winning the ball to the first entry port 64. Whether or not it is determined is made. Then, based on the determination result, the continuous notice permission flag and the game state flag after the continuous notice are set (see S410 to S420 in FIG. 18).

Specifically, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined to be "15R probability variation jackpot", the continuous advance notice effect is started. The permission is determined, and the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1". Then, since the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect in this case is determined to be a big hit, the game state flag after the continuous notice is set to "1" (see S413 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, even when the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined to be out of alignment and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is determined to be "out of front / back reach", a determination is made to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect. The continuous notice permission flag is set to "1". Then, since it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect in this case is out of order, the game state flag after the continuous advance notice is set to "0" (see S420 in FIG. 18). In other cases, it is determined not to allow the start of the continuous notice effect, and the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "0" and the game status flag after the continuous notice is set to "0" (FIG. 18). See S417).

In this way, when the jackpot is the most advantageous gaming state for the player (15R probability variation jackpot), or even if it is off, the reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot ( The value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1" only when the reach is out of front and back. As a result, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a high expectation.

In addition, as described above, in the determination of whether or not the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in connection with the start winning, which is performed in the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect, indicates a big hit. , The gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 that can be taken at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process, and the pachinko at the time of the judgment. Based on the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the machine 10, the jackpot random number table used for the determination is the low probability jackpot random number table 202a, the high probability jackpot random number table 202b, and the simple high. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit is set by selecting one from the probability big hit random number table 202c.

That is, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process by turning on the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination, which will be described later. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect by turning on the probability changing flag 203b, which will be described later, the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c is selected and the random number becomes a jackpot. The value of is set. As a result, even if both the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed in one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery is set by the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability 30 The lottery can be reliably performed based on the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, and in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the random number that becomes the jackpot of 10 set by the simple high probability time jackpot random number table 202c Since the processing time can be shortened by simply performing the jackpot determination based on the value, the timer interrupt processing in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect are performed is performed by the next timer. It can be completed by the start of the interrupt process. In particular, the jackpot lottery, which is an important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be completed within the time allocated to the timer interrupt process.

Further, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process by turning on the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination, which will be described later. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect due to the probability change flag 203b, which will be described later, is off, the high probability jackpot random number table 202b is selected and the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot. Is set. As a result, even if both the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed in one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery is set by the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability. Since the lottery is performed based on the value of one random number that becomes a big hit, the big hit is determined based on the value of the random number that becomes a big hit of 30 set by the high probability big hit random number table 202b in the permission judgment of the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Even if the above is strictly performed, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

Further, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process by turning off the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination, which will be described later. For example, the jackpot random number table 202a at low probability is selected, and the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set. As a result, even if both the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed in one timer interrupt process, the game of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start permission determination for the continuous advance notice effect. Regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect is the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the three jackpots set by the low probability big hit random number table 202a. Since only the value of the random number is compared with the value of the random number, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

In this way, the jackpot used to determine whether or not the first random number counter C1 acquired in connection with the start winning prize performed in the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect indicates a jackpot. The game state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 that can be taken at the time when the big hit lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process, and the judgment time In the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a, the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, and the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c, based on the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 in By selecting one of the above, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be surely completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

When the hold count command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 confirms the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command, and the value is confirmed. When is "1" and satisfies a predetermined condition, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see FIG. 26).

Here, the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied means a case where any one of the following (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied. First, (Condition 1) is that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set in all the variation effects held in the main control device 110 (see S1105: Yes in FIG. 26). That is, if the value of the continuous notice permission flag included in the received hold count command is "1" and the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set in all the held variable effects, the continuous advance notice effect has a predetermined probability. The start of the notice production is decided.

In (Condition 2), execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set in at least a part of the variation effect held in the main control device 110, and the continuous advance notice effect is performed in all the variation effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is set. The game state after the variable effect executed after being played becomes a "big hit", and the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of holds included in the hold count command and the execution of the continuous notice effect are set at the end. There are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the variable effect (holding ball) (that is, the difference between the value of the holding number counter 223a described later and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 3 or more. ) (S1105: No, S1106: Yes, S1108: Yes in FIG. 26).

That is, when the value of the continuous advance notice permission flag included in the received hold count command is "1", the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for at least a part of the already-held variable effect, and the continuous advance notice is set. If the game state after the variable effect, which is executed after the effect is performed, is a "big hit", the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of held times included in the received hold count command and the continuous advance notice effect are executed. Only when there are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the last variable effect (holding ball) in which is set, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability. Whether or not the game state after the variable effect executed after the continuous advance notice effect is the "big hit" is determined by the continuous advance notice state flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice display control device 113, which will be described later. Judged by the value.

In this case, after the final variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is performed, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is once set to the "big hit" state, so that the player feels the expectation of the continuous advance notice effect. It will be interrupted once by the "big hit". In such a state, between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of holdings included in the received hold count command and the last variable effect (holding ball) in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, 1 If there is only one variable effect (holding ball), if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is newly set for that one variable effect, the expectation due to the continuous advance notice effect is temporarily interrupted by the "big hit". Later, since the chance eye is displayed only once, the player may not be able to recognize the continuous advance notice effect, or the player may weaken the expectation for the continuous advance notice effect. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the number of held times included in the received hold number command and the final variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set ( Only when there are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the holding ball), the start of the continuous notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, so when the start of the continuous notice effect is decided. Is always displayed as a chance for two or more variable effects after the "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect, strengthen the expectation for the continuous advance notice effect, and enhance the interest of the game.

In (Condition 3), execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set in at least a part of the variation effect held in the main control device 110, and the continuous advance notice effect is performed in all the variation effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is set. The game state after the variable effect executed after being played is "off", and the game state after the continuous notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "big hit" (S1105 in FIG. 26). : No, S1106: No, S1109: Yes). That is, when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for at least a part of the already reserved variable effect, and the game state after the variable effect executed after the continuous advance notice effect is performed is "off". , The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which the permission is newly notified by the hold count command becomes a "big hit". It should be noted that whether or not the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect set for the already reserved variable effect is "off" is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice display control device 113, which will be described later. It is determined by the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous notice. In addition, whether or not the game state after the continuous notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command becomes a "big hit" is determined by the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (that is, the game state flag after the continuous notice). ) Is determined by whether or not the value is "1".

In this case, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "off" after the previously set continuous advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, in such a state, the game state after the continuous notice effect is "off". When the continuous advance notice effect is newly set, the player's expectation may be hindered as a result of the continuous advance notice effect being performed continuously. is there. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, only when the game state after the continuous notice production for which the permission is newly notified by the hold count command becomes a "big hit", the continuous notice has a predetermined probability. The start of the production is decided. As a result, if the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "off", the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined, so that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed. Regardless, it is possible to suppress the continuation of the "off" state, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being hindered. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the "off" state after the previously set continuous advance notice effect is performed and then the continuous notice effect is continuously performed, the player is told "big hit". It is possible to give a strong sense of expectation and motivate the player to continue the game. In this way, in all the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set, the game state after the variable effect is executed after the continuous advance notice effect is performed, and after the continuous advance notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command. Since it is determined whether or not to add the continuous advance notice effect according to the expectation received by the player based on the game state of the player, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player.

On the other hand, in the voice lamp control device 113, a predetermined probability (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous notice probability”) for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (that is, after the continuous notice). It is configured to be changed according to the value of the game state flag) (see S1111 to S1113 in FIG. 26). The change of this predetermined probability will be described later with reference to FIG.

As described above, among the processes related to the continuous advance notice effect, the main control device 110 only determines the permission of the continuous advance notice effect based on the result of the determination performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64. The determination result is included in the hold count command as a continuous advance notice permission flag and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the actual start of the continuous advance notice effect and sets the mode of the continuous advance notice effect based on the value of the continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command. As a result, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated in the most important processing of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery processing in which the gaming state to be transitioned based on the winning of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 is drawn. On the other hand, if the MPU 221 having a processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to set a wide variety of production modes for the continuous notice effect.

Further, in the main control device 110, when the lottery results in a jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, or even if the lottery is off, one step before the jackpot for the player. In the case of a reach (reach that is out of front and back) that impresses the fact, the continuous notice effect is transmitted by including the continuous notice permission flag that permits the continuous notice effect to the voice lamp control device 113 in the hold count command. That is, when the result of the lottery is not only a big hit but also a front-back out-of-reach reach, the main control device 110 allows continuous advance notice effect, and the information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 , It is possible to decide the execution of the continuous notice effect even in the case of the front-back off reach. As a result, even if the lottery results in continuous deviations, the continuous advance notice effect can give the player a high expectation, and the player will be bored. Can be prevented.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 203 will be continued. The probability changing flag 203b is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the “high probability state”, that is, whether or not the jackpot probability is increased, that is, whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). When the flag 203b is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probabilistic change. The probabilistic change flag 203b is set to off as an initial value. Then, the jackpot lottery performed when the variation start process (see S206 and FIG. 17 in FIG. 16) is executed in the variation process (see S104 and FIG. 16 in FIG. 15), which is one of the timer interrupt processes. Based on the result, the probability change in-probability flag 203b is set by the probability change setting process (see S106 and FIG. 19 in FIG. 15) that is performed after the variation process and the start winning process in the timer interrupt process.

That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot (“first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)” or “second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)”) (see S305: Yes in FIG. 17). First, the probability change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on. This probability change start flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot lottery is performed by the fluctuation start process in the timer interrupt process and the result is a probability change jackpot, and is usually set to off. Then, when the probability variation start flag is determined to be on by the probability variation setting process performed after the variation process and the start winning process in the timer interrupt process, the result of the jackpot lottery by the variation start process is the probability variation jackpot. It is determined that there is, and the probabilistic change flag 203b is set to ON (see S452 in FIG. 19). In the present embodiment, the probability change start flag is turned off when the probability change in progress flag 203b is turned on (see S453 in FIG. 19), but it may be turned off at the end of the timer interrupt process. It may be turned off at the start of the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot other than the probability variation jackpot ("1st probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)" and "second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)"), that is, "time saving jackpot" ( (See S305: No in FIG. 17), first, the probability change end flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on. This probability change end flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot lottery is performed by the fluctuation start process in the timer interrupt process and the high probability state (probability change state) is terminated because the result is a time saving jackpot. It is set to off. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation end flag is on by the probability variation setting process performed after the variation process and the start winning process in the timer interrupt process, the result of the jackpot lottery by the variation start process is a time-saving jackpot. Yes, it is determined that the high probability state (probability change state) is terminated, and the probability change in progress flag 203b is set to off (see S455 in FIG. 19). In the present embodiment, the probability change end flag is turned off when the probability change in progress flag 203b is turned off (see S456 in FIG. 19), but like the probability change start flag, at the end of the timer interrupt process. It may be turned off, or it may be turned off at the start of the timer interrupt processing.

If the result of the lottery is "missing" (see S304: No in FIG. 17), the setting of the probabilistic change flag 203b is retained. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, once the "first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)" or the "second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)" is reached, until the "time saving jackpot" occurs. The setting of the probabilistic change flag 203b is kept on. Therefore, during that time, the pachinko machine 10 is maintained in the "high probability state (during probabilistic change)".

The probability changing flag 203b is referred to when a big hit lottery of "big hit" or "missing" is performed based on the winning of the ball to the first ball opening 64 by the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 17), and the probability changing flag 203b is used. The jackpot probability is set by selecting the jackpot random number table to be used from the low probability jackpot random number table 202a and the high probability jackpot random number table 202b based on the value of 203b (see S301 to S303 in FIG. 17). ). That is, when the probability changing flag 203b is on, the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability is selected, and the jackpot probability is set to a high state (see S303 in FIG. 17). On the other hand, when the probability changing flag 203b is off, the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability is selected, and the jackpot probability is set to the normal state (low probability state) (see S302 in FIG. 17).

Further, the probabilistic change flag 203b is referred to in the start winning process (see FIG. 18). That is, in the start winning process, the first permission is determined to start the continuous advance notice effect when the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is detected, and the first winning is obtained in connection with the starting winning. When determining whether or not the value of the hit random number counter C1 is the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot, the probability changing flag 203b is set in order to select the jackpot random number table that sets the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot in the determination. Referenced.

Specifically, it is presumed that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the variation start process (that is, during the probability change for continuous notice determination described later). When the flag 203c is on (see S405: Yes in FIG. 18), the probability changing flag 203b is referred to (see S407 in FIG. 18), the probability changing flag 203b is on, and the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. If the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (during probabilistic change) at the time of, the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c is selected and the value of the random number to be the jackpot is set (S408 in FIG. 18). reference). As a result, as described above, in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot determination is simply performed based on the value of the random number that becomes the 10 jackpots set by the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c. Therefore, the processing time can be shortened, so that even if the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice production are executed in one timer interrupt processing, the processing time becomes longer due to the probability change. , The one timer interrupt process can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. In particular, the jackpot lottery, which is an important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be completed within the time allocated to the timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start prize detected in the start prize process is performed in the change start process (that is, the continuous advance notice determination described later). If the probability changing flag 203c is on), the probability changing flag 203b is off, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect, the probability is high as described above. The hourly jackpot random number table 202b is selected, and the value of the random number to be the jackpot is set (see S409 in FIG. 18). In this case, since the time required for the jackpot lottery is short, the jackpot determination is strictly performed based on the value of the random number of 30 jackpots set by the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability in the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect. However, the timer interrupt process in which both the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are executed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process (that is, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination described later is off. In the case of (see S405: No in FIG. 18), as described above, the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability is selected regardless of the value of the probability changing flag 203b, and the random number to be the jackpot is set (see S405: No in FIG. 18). See S406 in FIG. 18). In this case, since the time required for determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect is short, the pachinko machine 10 at the time of determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect is a big hit regardless of whether the game state is a high probability state or a low probability state. The timer interrupt process in which the lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, the probability changing flag 203c is not set in the fluctuation start processing in which the jackpot lottery is performed, but as described above, the start winning process is based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start processing. It is performed by the probability change setting process executed after. As a result, in one timer interrupt process, the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the big hit lottery by the fluctuation start process is performed is maintained at least during the start winning process. To. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, the fluctuation start process is performed in one timer interrupt process, and even if the result of the jackpot lottery is a probabilistic jackpot, the one timer interrupt process is performed. In the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect performed in the start winning process of the inclusion process, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the permission determination is made is the gaming state at the time when the jackpot lottery by the variation start process is performed, that is , It can be judged as a low probability state. In this way, in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, when the jackpot lottery is performed in the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the permission determination is made. Since the game state (high probability state or low probability state) can be reflected, the selection of the jackpot random number table used in the permission judgment of the continuous advance notice production is selected by the jackpot random number used in the jackpot lottery performed by the fluctuation start processing. It can be done after grasping the table accurately.

The probabilistic change flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is a variable effect corresponding to the start winning when a ball winning (starting winning) to the first ball opening 64 is detected in the starting winning process (see FIG. 18). This is a flag that estimates the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the jackpot lottery is performed in the fluctuation start process. When the continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203c is on, it is estimated that the game state is a high probability state (that is, during probability change), and when the continuous advance notice determination probability change flag 203c is off, the probability is low. Presumed to be in a state.

The continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203c is set to off as an initial value. Then, in the start winning process (see FIG. 18), the start winning is performed in the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect performed when the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 (starting winning) is detected. Based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired together indicates a jackpot, and the result of the determination as to whether or not the value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates a probability variation jackpot, it is continuous. The probabilistic change flag 203c for advance notice determination is set. Specifically, when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is determined to be a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is determined to be "15R probability variation jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot", the start thereof. Since it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 will be in a high probability state after the variation effect corresponding to the winning is performed, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination is set to ON (see S412 and S415 in FIG. 18).

On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the random number counter C1 per first is a jackpot, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is a "time saving jackpot" other than "15R probability variation jackpot" and "2R probability variation jackpot". If this is the case, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low-probability state after the variation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed, so the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is set to off (FIG. 18). See S416). Further, when it is determined that the value of the random number counter C1 per first is out of alignment, it is estimated that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained even after the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning prize, so that the probability change for continuous advance notice determination is made. The value of the medium flag 203c is maintained.

The probabilistic change flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is referred to in the start winning process (see FIG. 18). Specifically, in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect performed when the winning of the ball (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 is detected, the first random number acquired with the starting winning is obtained. When determining whether or not the value of the counter C1 is the value of a random number that will be a jackpot, in order to select a jackpot random number table that sets the value of the random number that will be a jackpot in that determination, the probability changing flag for continuous advance notice determination 203c is used.

Then, when the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination is on (see S405: Yes in FIG. 18), the pachinko machine 10 is at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the change start process. Is presumed to be in a high probability state, so one of the high probability jackpot random number table 202b and the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c is selected as the jackpot random number table based on the value of the probability changing flag 203b.

That is, when the value of the probability changing flag 203b is on (that is, the probability is changing), the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is selected (see S408 in FIG. 18). As a result, in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot determination is performed based on the value of the random number of 10 jackpots set by the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c, so that the processing time should be shortened. Even if the jackpot lottery at the start of fluctuation and the permission judgment for the start of continuous advance notice production, which take a long time to process due to the probability change, are executed in one timer interrupt process, the next timer interrupt is executed. The timer interrupt process can be completed by the start of the process.

When the probability change flag 203b is off (that is, the probability change is not in progress and the probability is low), the high probability jackpot random number table 202b is selected (see S409 in FIG. 18). In this case, since the time required for the jackpot lottery process at the start of fluctuation is short, the jackpot is based on the value of the random number of 30 jackpots set by the high probability jackpot random number table 202b in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Even if the judgment is made strictly, if the jackpot lottery and the permission judgment for the start of the continuous advance notice production are executed by one timer interrupt processing, the one timer interrupt processing is performed before the start of the next timer interrupt processing. Can be completed.

On the other hand, when the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination is off (see S405: No in FIG. 18), the pachinko machine 10 is at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the fluctuation start process. Is presumed to be in a low-probability state, so that the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a is selected regardless of the value of the probabilistic change flag 203b (see S406 in FIG. 18). In this case, since the time required for determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect is short, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect varies regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. When the jackpot lottery at the start of the production and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice production are executed by one timer interrupt processing, the one timer interrupt processing is completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing. Can be done.

Further, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is referred to when it is determined to be out of the jackpot determination of the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process (see FIG. 18) (see S418 in FIG. 18). .. Then, when the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is off, that is, when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start prize detected in the start prize process is performed in the change start process, the pachinko machine 10 When it is presumed that the state is in a low probability state, the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect is performed based on whether or not the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicates "reach out of front and back" (FIG. See S419 in 18). As a result, even if the result of the jackpot lottery of the variable production corresponding to the start winning is out of order, the reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot (front and back out reach) is the first. Since the start of the continuous advance notice effect on the 3 symbol display device 81 is permitted, when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the player can have a high expectation for the big hit. ..

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is high when the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination is on, that is, when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start prize detected in the start prize process is performed in the change start process. If it is presumed to be in a stochastic state (during probabilistic change), the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not permitted regardless of whether or not the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicates "reach out of front and back". The determination is made, and the continuous advance notice permission flag, which is the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command, is set to "0" (see S417 in FIG. 18). As a result, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the start winning is out of order, the continuous notice effect can be hidden in the third symbol display device 81, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability change). When the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in (middle), it can be suggested to the player that the result of the variable effect performed after the continuous advance notice effect is not a deviation but a big hit. .. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), the player is playing with the expectation that the player will eventually become a big hit, so that the result of the variable effect performed after the continuous advance notice effect is out of order. If this happens, the player may be discouraged, but in the present embodiment, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 is displayed in the high probability state (during probabilistic change) and the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the variable effect performed after the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player can feel a higher interest.

Further, in the start winning process, when the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on, as described above, the jackpot determination in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect is performed using the simple high probability time jackpot random number table 202c. It is not possible to determine all the jackpots from the first hit random number counter C1 acquired with the start winning, but in this embodiment, the first hit random number counter C1 that should be the jackpot is " Even if it is determined to be "off", if the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on, it is configured to determine that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not permitted based on the determination result of "off". (See S418: Yes in FIG. 18), and as a result, the appearance probability of the continuous notice effect is reduced. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probability change), if the continuous notice effect is displayed for the probability change jackpot with the same appearance probability as in the low probability state, the player feels annoyed. However, if the appearance probability of the continuous advance notice effect is reduced as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling annoyed.

By the way, as in the present embodiment, in the jackpot determination in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect, when the probability change during probability change flag 203c for the continuous advance notice determination is on, the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c may be used. Because of this (see S408 in FIG. 18), even though the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, it may be determined to be out of order. Therefore, the first random number acquired with the start winning prize. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates a time saving jackpot, that is, the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state after the variation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed. Even in this case, the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203c may not be turned off and may be kept on. Further, if the start winning is detected again while the continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203c is not turned off and is kept on, the value (off) that the continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203c should originally indicate is Since they show different values (on), the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot judgment at that time cannot be selected correctly, the jackpot judgment is not performed correctly, and the value of the probabilistic change flag 203c for continuous notice judgment is in the original state. There is a possibility that it will be out of alignment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery accompanying the fluctuation start performed in the fluctuation start processing is a time-saving jackpot (see S305: No in FIG. 17), the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability after the fluctuation production. Since it becomes a state, the probability change end flag (not shown) indicating the end of the high probability state (probability change state) is turned on, and the probability change during continuous notice determination flag 203c is set to off (see S309 in FIG. 17). .. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery associated with the fluctuation start performed in the fluctuation start processing is a probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot) (see S305: Yes in FIG. 17), the pachinko machine after the fluctuation production. Since 10 is in the high probability state (probability change state), the probability change start flag (not shown) indicating the start of the high probability state (probability change state) is turned on, and the probability change in progress flag 203c for continuous notice determination is set to on. (See S307 in FIG. 17).

As a result, even if the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination deviates from the original state due to the use of the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c in the jackpot determination in the start winning process (see FIG. 18). At the stage when the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start prize detected in the start prize process is performed in the variable start process, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination can be reset based on the jackpot lottery result. it can. Therefore, even if the jackpot determination is simply performed using the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c in the start winning process, the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the starting winning is performed in the variable start process. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be estimated without any problem by the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination.

In addition, if the jackpot judgment corresponding to the start prize detected in the start prize process is simply performed and the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice judgment deviates from the original state, the start prize is supported at the longest. Until the jackpot lottery for the variable effect is performed in the variable start process, the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination remains deviated from the original state. Then, while the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination deviates from the original state, the jackpot random number table is not selected according to the original state in the start winning process, so the start detected in the start winning process. The jackpot determination corresponding to the winning will not be performed correctly, but the result of the jackpot determination here is only used for the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, this does not pose a problem because it only affects the presence or absence of the display of the continuous notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 and does not affect the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and the like. A solenoid 209 including a switch 208, a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, hold lamp 85, etc.) 227. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the variation effect (variation display) and the continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The continuous notice determination table 222a is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the RAM 223 is provided with a hold count counter 223a, a continuous notice determination counter 223b, a continuous notice count counter 223c, a continuous notice post-state flag 223d, a continuous notice mode flag 223e, and an effect mode counter 223f. Here, for convenience of explanation, the continuous notice determination counter 223b will be described first, and then the continuous notice determination table 222a, the hold count counter 223a, the continuous notice count counter 223c, the continuous notice post-state flag 223d, and the continuous notice mode flag 223e. The effect mode counter 223f will be described in this order.

The continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is a counter used for determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect, and is updated once every time the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is updated, for example, by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 127, reaching the maximum value (that is, 127), and then returning to 0.

The voice lamp control device 113 is set when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 110 is "1" and satisfies the above-mentioned predetermined condition. The start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b and the continuous advance notice determination table 222a described below (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 26).

In the continuous notice determination table 222a, when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 110 is "1", that is, the main control device 110 to the third symbol display device This is a table for setting the "continuous notice determination probability" when there is a notification permitting the start of the continuous notice effect in 81 and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the continuous advance notice determination probability is the probability of deciding to start the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 when receiving a notification permitting the start of the continuous advance notice effect and satisfying a predetermined condition. Is. The voice lamp control device 113 compares the continuous advance notice determination table 222a with the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b, and when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is within the range indicated by the continuous advance notice determination table 222a, the third It is determined that the symbol display device 81 is to start the continuous advance notice effect (see S1114 and S1115 of FIG. 26).

Here, the details of the continuous notice determination table 222a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice determination table 222a. As shown in FIG. 8, the continuous notice determination table 222a has two tables, a jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 and a missed continuous notice determination table 222a2. The voice lamp control device 113 determines the hold count command when the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 110 is "1" and satisfies a predetermined condition. One table to be used for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability is selected from the two tables in the continuous advance notice determination table 222a according to the 0th bit (game state flag after continuous advance notice) of the high-order byte. That is, when the game state flag after continuous notice is "1" (the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is "big hit"), the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected, and the game state flag after continuous notice is "0". (The game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off"), the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of off is selected (see S1111 to S1113 in FIG. 26). As a result, the probability of determining the continuous advance notice can be changed according to the game state (whether it is a "big hit" or "missing") after the continuous advance notice effect is completed.

Both the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 222a2 can be taken by the hold count counter 223a (the number of hold of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110) in the voice lamp control device 113. The range of the continuous notice determination counter 223b (hereinafter, referred to as "continuous notice determination range") for determining the start of the continuous notice effect is defined in association with the values "1" to "4".

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 defines “0” as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value “1” of the hold count counter 223a, and the value of the hold count counter 223a. "0 to 15" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with "2", and "0 to 39" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the hold count counter 223a, and is held. In association with the value "4" of the number-of-times counter 223a, "0 to 63" is defined as the continuous advance notice determination range.

Further, the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection defines "0" as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value "1" of the hold count counter 223a, and associates it with the value "2" of the hold count counter 223a. , "0-9" is specified as the continuous notice determination range, and "0 to 25" is specified as the continuous notice determination range in association with the value "3" of the hold count counter 223a, and the value "0" of the hold count counter 223a is specified. In association with "4", "0 to 39" is defined as the continuous notice determination range.

The voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command from the main control device 110, and the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is "1" and satisfies a predetermined condition. If either of the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 222a2 is selected as the table for setting the continuous advance notice determination probability, the selected continuous advance notice determination table at that time is selected. The continuous advance notice determination range associated with the value of the hold count counter 223a is specified, and when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b at that time is included in the continuous advance notice determination range, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined.

By the way, in both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 8, it is defined that the larger the value of the hold count counter 223a, the wider the continuous advance notice determination range. However, if the continuous advance notice determination range is wide, it becomes easier to determine that the continuous advance notice effect is to be performed, and the continuous advance notice determination probability becomes high. Therefore, both the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 It can be said that the larger the number of times the fluctuation display is held in the main control device 110, the higher the probability of continuous notice determination. Here, since the continuous advance notice effect is performed over all the variable effects that are held when the continuous notice effect is decided, the larger the number of hold times, the higher the continuous notice decision probability can be set. There is a high possibility that the number of variable effects included in the continuous advance notice effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the more the continuous advance notice effect is performed over many continuous variable effects, the more the effect is different from the normal effect, which is special to the player. You can have a sense of expectation. In addition, since the number of hold times of the variable display generally takes a small value, when the number of hold times is small, it is possible to suppress the continuous advance notice effect from being frequently performed, while the number of hold times is high. When it becomes large, it is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

Further, when the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 and the missed continuous notice determination table 222a2 in the example of FIG. 8 are compared, the continuous notice determination range associated with the same value of the hold count counter 223a is the jackpot continuous. The notice determination table 222a1 is defined to be the same or wider than the continuous notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection. That is, the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "big hit" is the same as or higher than the continuous advance notice determination probability when the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off". Is also set to be high. As a result, when the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the game state will be a "big hit" after the end of the continuous notice effect. , It is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In addition, the probability that the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won in the first entrance 64) is a "big hit" is usually higher than the probability that the game is "missing". Is also set small, so if the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect is "off", it can be suppressed so that the continuous advance notice effect is not frequently performed, while in the case of "big hit" , It is possible to facilitate continuous advance notice production.

Further, in the main control device 110, not only the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64 is a big hit, but also in the case of the front-back out-of-reach reach, the permission determination of the continuous advance notice production is made. The determination result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 as a continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 may determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of front-back deviation reach or the like according to the determination result (value of the continuous advance notice permission flag of the hold count command) and various conditions. Therefore, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect under a wide variety of conditions. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is performed. In addition, even if the lottery results in continuous deviations, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player can have a high expectation and the player can be prevented from getting bored. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The hold count counter 223a of the RAM 223 is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the number of hold times of the variation effect held by the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts (waiting count) up to 4 times. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the hold count of the variable display is added by winning the ball to the first entry port 64, the hold count is set. The value of the hold count counter 203a of the main controller 110 stored in the lower byte of the command (that is, the hold count of the fluctuation effect held by the main controller 110) is extracted, and the extracted value is used as the hold count counter. It is stored in 223a (see S1008 in FIG. 25). Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command which is the instruction command of the variation effect from the main control device 110 and sets the mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the voice lamp control device 113 holds the command. The value of the count counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S1211 in FIG. 27). In this way, since the value of the hold count counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold count counter 203a of the main control device 110.

The value of the hold count counter 223a is used for the lighting process of the hold lamp 85. That is, of the four hold lamps 85 provided, only the number of hold lamps 85 corresponding to the value of the hold count counter 223a is turned on, and the remaining hold lamps 85 are turned off (see S905 in FIG. 24). Further, the value of the hold count counter 223a is a case where the continuous notice determination range is set according to the number of holds from the continuous notice determination table 222a (either the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 or the missed continuous notification determination table 222a2). Also used for.

The continuous notice number counter 223c is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous notice effect is executed. The initial value of the continuous advance notice counter 223c is set to 0, and as described above, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined based on the hold count command received from the main control device 110, the hold count counter at that time is determined. The value of 223a is stored (see S1116 in FIG. 26).

The value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is referred to when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, which is a fluctuation display instruction command from the main control device 110. At this time, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2 or more, the chance eye (the combination of the third symbol on the middle line L2 shown in FIG. 4 is combined with the setting of the mode of the variation effect) as the stop symbol. “3”, “4”, and “1”) are set in order from the left symbol column Z1 (see S1317 in FIG. 28). Then, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is decremented by 1 (see S1209 in FIG. 27), and the set variation effect mode and stop symbol are determined by the notification display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command. , The display control device 114 is notified (see S1210 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set in accordance with the mode of the variation effect (see S1207 in FIG. 27), and the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command are used. The mode of the set variation effect and the stop symbol are notified to the display control device 114 (see S1210 in FIG. 27), and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is held at 0 (see S1209 in FIG. 27). ..

Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 1, since it is the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the chance eye is not displayed as a stop symbol, and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is not displayed. As in the case of 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set in accordance with the mode of the variation effect notified from the main control device 110 (see S1207 in FIG. 27), and the display variation pattern command and the display stop symbol command are used. , The mode of the set variation effect and the stop symbol are notified to the display control device 114 (see S1210 in FIG. 27). However, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is updated so as to decrease by 1 (see S1209 in FIG. 27).

In this way, each time a variation pattern command is received, the variation effect is performed in the mode in which the variation effect is set in the third symbol display device 81 controlled by the display control device 114, and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2. While it is the above value, the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect. Here, the continuous advance notice number counter 223c stores the value of the hold number counter 223c at that time when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and when the value is other than 0, The value is decremented by 1 as the variation pattern command is received. Therefore, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, all the variable effects held in the main control device 110 before the hold of the variable effect corresponding to the hold count command that is the basis of the decision to start the continuous advance notice effect. As the stop symbol of, the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the chance eye is continuously displayed as the stop symbols of all the fluctuation effects held in the main control device 110, so that the continuous advance notice effect is performed. That is, the player can easily recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the variable effect that is most closely watched during the game. Further, even if the jackpot symbol does not appear as the stop symbol, the chance eye is displayed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that the jackpot will be obtained after the continuous advance notice production is completed. ..

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command, if the first bit (that is, the continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is "1", the main control device 110 is set. The value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is referred to in order to determine whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set in the held variable effect (see S1105 in FIG. 26). When the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 0 (see S1105: Yes in FIG. 26), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set in all the variable effects held in the main control device 110. It is determined that the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (condition 1) are satisfied, and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (see S1105: No in FIG. 26), the continuous advance notice effect is performed in at least one of the variable effects held in the main control device 110. Since the execution of is set, it is further determined whether or not (Condition 2) or (Condition 3) among the above-mentioned predetermined conditions is satisfied. When the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 1, as described above, the chance eye is not displayed on the third symbol display device as the stop symbol, but the last variable effect (that is, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set). (Fluctuating effect performed as a result of the continuous advance notice effect), it is determined that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set even if the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223c is 1.

As described above, among the processes related to the continuous advance notice effect, the main control device 110 only determines the permission of the continuous advance notice effect based on the result of the lottery performed when the ball is won in the first entry port 64. In the voice lamp control device 113, the actual start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined according to the result of the permission determination, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect is performed. (Holding ball) is also managed. Therefore, by causing the voice lamp control device 113 to perform complicated processing, the main control device 110 can concentrate the processing on the lottery processing.

The state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is set after all the continuous advance notice effects set for the plurality of variable effects are executed by storing the value of the hold number counter 223a in the continuous advance notice number counter 223c. It is a flag indicating the game state after the fluctuation effect. When the value of the status flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is "1", it indicates that the game state after the variable effect after all the continuous advance notice effects are executed is the "big hit" state, and after the continuous advance notice. When the value of the state flag 223d is "0", it indicates that the gaming state after the variation effect after all the continuous advance notice effects are executed is the "off" state. It should be noted that the variation effect after all the executions after the continuous advance notice is performed is the variation effect performed when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 1.

When the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the hold number command received from the main control device 110, the continuous advance notice state flag 223d is set to the 0th higher byte of the hold number command. The value of the bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous advance notice) is stored (see S1117 in FIG. 26). Then, the value is retained until the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command, the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is "1", and the hold count command is held by the main control device 110. When it is determined that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect, the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is referred to (see S1106 in FIG. 26). Then, when the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is "1" (see S1106: Yes in FIG. 26), the variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set. Since the later game state is the "big hit" state, the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received hold count command and the final variable effect (holding ball) in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set are further set. Whether or not there are two or more fluctuation effects (holding balls) in between (that is, whether or not the difference between the value of the holding number counter 223a and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 3 or more) is determined. It is determined whether or not (Condition 2) is satisfied among the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (see S1108 in FIG. 26).

On the other hand, when the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is "0" (see S1106: No in FIG. 26), the variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set. Since the later game state is the "off" state, whether or not the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which the permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "big hit" (that is, the higher rank of the hold count command). It is determined whether or not the 0th bit of the byte (whether or not the game state flag after the end of continuous advance notice) is 1), and whether or not (condition 3) is satisfied among the above-mentioned predetermined conditions is determined (FIG. See S1109 of 26).

The continuous notice mode flag 223e sets the effect mode of the continuous notice effect when the continuous notice effect is set in the variation effect (hold ball) for each variation effect (hold ball) held in the main control device 110. This is the flag to set. Here, the details of the continuous notice mode flag 223e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous notice mode flag 223e.

As shown in FIG. 9, the continuous advance notice mode flag 223e is configured as a 1-byte (8-bit) variable, and corresponds to each hold count for each bit from the 3rd bit to the 0th bit (lower 4 bits). The variable effects (holding balls) are assigned to each. Then, for each bit, the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the reserved ball assigned to the bit is set. Specifically, a variable effect (first reserved ball) having a hold count of "1" is assigned to the 0th bit of the continuous advance notice mode flag 223e, and a variable effect (first hold ball) having a hold count of "2" is assigned to the first bit. 2 hold balls) are assigned, the 2nd bit is assigned a variable effect with a hold count of "3" (3rd hold ball), and the 3rd bit is assigned a variable effect with a hold count of "4" (4 hold balls). Is assigned. Then, when "0" is set in each bit, it is shown that when the continuous advance notice effect is set in the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the bit, the normal mode is set as the effect mode. , "1" is set, and when the continuous advance notice effect is set in the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the bit, it indicates that a special aspect is set as the effect mode. In the 7th to 4th bits (upper 4 bits) of the continuous notice mode flag 223e, "0" is set as an unused area.

Here, in the present embodiment, among the production modes of the continuous advance notice effect, the normal mode displays a normal color (for example, blue) as the background color when the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable effect. , The special mode is to display a special color (for example, red) as a background color when displaying a chance eye as a stop symbol of a variation effect, but is not limited to this, and each mode (usually). In the aspect and the special aspect), different symbols may be displayed or different sounds may be output. Further, in a special aspect, a special character may be displayed.

The continuous warning mode flag 223e is set by the voice lamp control device 113 as follows. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold count command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is "1". If the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined when (Condition 3) is satisfied among the above-mentioned predetermined conditions, the variable effect (holding ball) held in the main control device 110 at that time. Of these, all the bits corresponding to the variable effect (holding ball) for which the continuous notice effect is newly set this time are set to "1" (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 26). That is, a special mode is set as an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set this time.

The above-mentioned "variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set this time" is a variable effect (holding ball) held in the main control device 110 when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined. ), Which is a variable effect (holding ball) excluding the variable effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect has already been set in the past.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command, which is an instruction command for the fluctuation effect, from the main control device 110, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is a value other than 0 (that is, 1 or more), Since the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command, the variation effect indicated by the received variation pattern command among the continuous advance notice mode flags 223e, that is, the first hold ball (number of holds). Determines whether or not the bit corresponding to (variation display of "1") is "1". Then, when it is "1", the third symbol display device 81 is set so that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in a special mode. Specifically, the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command (see FIG. 10) for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode of the variation effect from the voice lamp control device 113 is set to "1". (See S1319 in FIG. 28). As a result, in the display control device 114, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the received fluctuation pattern command for display is set to "1", the background color is displayed when the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect. Is set to be a special color (see S1727 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to "0", the background color is set to be the normal color when the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the variation effect. (See S1728 in FIG. 32).

Further, each time the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command, which is an instruction command for the fluctuation effect, from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 shifts the content of the continuous advance notice mode flag 223e to the right side (LSB side) by one bit. , 0 is inserted into the vacant 7th bit (see S1212 in FIG. 27). As a result, as the variable effect (variable display) is set and the reserved balls are consumed, the effect modes of the continuous advance notice effect set for each of the second to fourth reserved balls are set to the first to first. The bit corresponding to the third reserved sphere (0th to 2nd bits) is set, and the bit corresponding to the 4th reserved sphere (3rd bit) is a value of "0" shifted from the 4th bit. (That is, a "normal mode" is set as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect).

As described above, in the continuous notice mode flag 223e, the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is "1", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3). ) Is satisfied, and when it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect, among the variable effects (holding balls) held in the main control device 110 at that time, the variation in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set this time. All the bits corresponding to the effect (holding ball) are set to "1" (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 26). Then, every time the variable display mode is set, the continuous advance notice mode flag 223e is shifted by one bit to the right while inserting 0 into the vacant bits. As a result, as the variable effect (variable effect) is set and the reserved ball is consumed, the setting of the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect is shifted by one bit to the right, so that the variable pattern command is received. When setting the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, if the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball is referred to, the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (first reserved ball) corresponding to the variation pattern command can be referred to. The setting contents of the aspect can be referred to accurately.

Further, one of the conditions (condition 3) in which the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability is that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for at least a part of the already reserved variable effect. It is a condition that the game state after the continuous notice effect is performed is "off", and further, the game state after the continuous notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "big hit". Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by satisfying (Condition 3), the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set is performed. By setting the effect mode as a special mode, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "off" as a result of the continuous advance notice effect set in the past, a new setting is made thereafter. Since the continuous advance notice effect is executed in a special mode, the player can be strongly expected to be a "big hit" by the special mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The effect mode counter 223f sets the variation effect mode in the third symbol display device 81 of the variation effect excluding the last variation effect among the variation effects set to execute the continuous notice effect from among a plurality of effect mode candidates. It is a counter for determining one, and is updated once every time the fluctuation display process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (see S1201 in FIG. 27). The effect mode counter 223f is updated, for example, by adding 1 in order within the range of 0 to 3, reaching the maximum value (that is, 3), and then returning to 0.

The voice lamp control device 113 confirms the content of the fluctuation start flag that is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command, which is an instruction command for the fluctuation effect, is received from the main control device 110 in the fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 27). (See S1202 in FIG. 27), and if the fluctuation start flag is on, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is further confirmed (see S1206 in FIG. 27). Then, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2 or more, it is determined that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command, and the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 28) is performed. Execute.

Then, in this continuous advance notice setting process, the continuous advance notice effect is performed based on the variation pattern (variation time) in the variation effect instructed by the main control device 110 by the variation pattern command and the value of the effect mode counter 223f. In this case, the effect mode of the variation effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display variation pattern command (variation effect from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114) according to the effect mode. Generates a 2-byte command) that indicates the mode of production. In addition, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is set so as to be the chance of "3", "4", and "1", and the content is displayed and controlled by the display stop symbol command. Notified to device 114 (see S1317 in FIGS. 10 and 28).

Here, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14, the types of effect modes of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a type of effect mode of the variable effect in which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. In the explanatory diagram of FIG. 10, in the left two columns, the “variation pattern instructed by the main control device” indicating the variation pattern (fluctuation time) indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is displayed. The "effect mode counter" indicating the value of the mode counter 223f is described, and the values of the "variation pattern instructed by the main controller" (variation time) and the "effect mode counter" are shown in the three columns following the right side. The contents of the variable effect mode set according to the situation are described by dividing into three items of "first effect", "second effect", and "third effect". Further, in the rightmost column, a "display variation pattern command" indicating the contents of the display variation pattern command corresponding to each variation effect mode is described.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation (“normal reach variation”, “super reach variation”, “super reach variation”, In the case of any of "special reach fluctuations"), the fluctuation effects are distributed to a plurality of times (up to 3 times) of pseudo fluctuation effects according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. The pseudo variation effect is a plurality of variation effects performed on the third symbol display device 81 for one reserved ball, and as a mode of the pseudo variation effect distributed here, the length of the variation time is long. Five types of deviation variation effect modes are prepared according to the situation, and the variation pattern can be divided into a plurality of (maximum 3 times) pseudo variation effect within the variation time of the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110. In addition, the mode of each pseudo fluctuation effect is determined from the five types of deviation fluctuations. In the explanatory diagram of FIG. 10, the mode of the pseudo variation effect of up to three times is described in three items of "first effect", "second effect", and "third effect".

That is, in the item of "first effect", the effect mode of the variation effect or the pseudo variation effect to be performed immediately after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 is described, and in the item of "second effect". , The production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect to be performed after the pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the mode described in the "first effect" is described, and the item of the "third effect" is the "second effect". The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect performed after the pseudo variation effect is performed in the mode described in the above is described.

In the explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 10, when the variation effect is not distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects (the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is "off variation" (variation time: 11 seconds)). In the case where there is, or when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0), the effect mode of the variable effect is described only in the item of "first effect". In addition, when the variation effect is divided into two pseudo variation effects, each item of "first effect" and "second effect" describes the effect mode of the two pseudo variation effects. , When the variable effect is divided into three pseudo variable effects, the three pseudo variable effects are added to each item of "first effect", "second effect", and "third effect". Each aspect is described.

Here, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the variation effect is simulated a plurality of times (up to 3 times). The reason for allocating to the variable production will be explained. In the reach variation effect, the fluctuations of the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped before the middle symbol row Z2, and the third symbol on the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is the five effective lines L1 to L5. It is an effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81 so that they are aligned on at least one effective line, and when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, the three symbol rows Z1 to on at least one effective line. This is the most basic effect that can give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit with all the third symbols displayed on the Z3. The player is looking forward to the appearance of this reach variation effect and is playing the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is set so as to be the chance of "3", "4", and "1". As a result, the reach variation effect is not performed in the variation effect, and the variation effect is stopped even when the third symbols are not aligned in the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped before the middle symbol row Z2. It is possible to give the player the pleasure of displaying the chance eye at times.

As described above, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed when the variable effect is stopped, such as displaying the chance eyes when the variable effect is stopped, there are the following problems. As described above, the determination of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect is made by the various counters (see FIG. 6) acquired at that time when the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected. When it is performed based on the value and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the variable effects that were held before the winning of the first ball opening 64 was detected. (Display of chance eyes) is set.

Here, the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect does not take into consideration the effect mode (whether or not the reach variation effect) of the variable effect that was suspended before the winning of the first ball opening 64 was detected. There is a possibility that the effect mode of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach variable effect. However, as described above, the reach variation effect is an effect in which the stopping methods of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are characterized. Therefore, the continuous advance notice effect is provided for the variation effect whose production mode is the reach variation effect. Even if the execution is set, the chance eye cannot be displayed as a stop symbol as it is. Therefore, when the effect mode of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach variation effect, it is possible to give priority to the reach variation effect and not to display the chance eye as a stop symbol. , There is a risk of interrupting the sense of continuity that can be given to the player when the chance eyes are displayed over a plurality of variable displays. On the other hand, in order to display the chance eye in the reach variation mode, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3" and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol "1" in the time allocated to the reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a low speed, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are not aligned, which gives a strange impression to the player. Will be given. Further, within the time allotted to the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3", the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol "3" to display the reach symbol, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the row Z2 is stopped, if the right symbol row Z3 is slid and the variable display is performed again to display the symbol "1" on the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, the production will be very delayed, and the player will get bored.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. By deciding from five types of deviation variation production modes as the production mode of each pseudo variation effect, if the deviation variation mode is a stop symbol other than the jackpot symbol, the stop mode can be freely selected. Since it can be set, it can be easily set as a chance eye as a stop symbol of the pseudo fluctuation effect. Therefore, even if an arbitrary variation pattern is instructed by the main control device 110, the continuous advance notice effect can be reliably performed, so that the player can surely have a feeling of expectation due to the continuous advance notice effect. Can be made. Further, by setting the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect as the deviating variation mode, the data of the deviating variation mode prepared for the normal variation effect can be used as it is. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare data for the pseudo fluctuation effect, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for distribution to the pseudo variation effect a plurality of times.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. In addition to sorting, immediately after the reach variation effect is performed, the third symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated so that their contents can be slid in a visible manner. It can be changed. Then, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of re-variation. As a result, even when the effect mode of the variation effect instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation mode, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily executed. Further, even if the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the variation effect can be performed in the reach variation mode, so that the player can be satisfied by performing the variation effect in the reach variation mode that the player is looking forward to. it can.

In addition, since the re-variation is performed after the deviated reach symbol is displayed depending on the reach variation mode, the player is expected to perform some effect even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed depending on the reach variation mode. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the re-variation, the continuous advance notice effect can be performed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 10, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is out of the variation mode (variation time: 11 seconds), the effect mode is Regardless of the value of the counter 223f, one "disengagement fluctuation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is set as the variation effect mode as instructed by the main control device 110. Then, "AA01H" or "AB01H" is set as the display variation pattern command in this case, and is transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, chance eyes of "3", "4", and "1" are set as the stop symbols of the variation effect, and the contents are notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command. As a result, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 is subjected to the variation effect according to the deviation variation mode of the variation time of 11 seconds, and the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol.

In the display variation pattern command, when the upper byte is "AAH", the display control device 114 is notified that the mode is the normal mode for the continuous advance notice effect, and the upper byte is "ABH". In the case of ", it is notified that it is a special mode as a production mode of the continuous notice effect. Here, in the present embodiment, among the production modes of the continuous advance notice effect, in the normal mode, as described above, a normal color (for example, blue) is used as the background color when the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable effect. It is displayed, and the special mode is to display a special color (for example, red) as a background color when displaying a chance eye as a stop symbol of a variation effect.

The setting of the display variation pattern command is performed in the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the voice lamp control device 113. In this process, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is once set to "AAH" to generate the command (see S1302, S1305, etc. in FIG. 28). Then, if the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball of the continuous advance notice mode flag 223e is "1", by adding "0100H" to the display variation pattern command once set, the higher level is obtained. Change the bite to "ABH" (see S1319 in FIG. 28).

In the present embodiment, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is once set to "AAH", and then the upper byte is changed to "ABH" according to the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e. First, the bit (0th bit) corresponding to the first reserved ball of the continuous notice mode flag 223e is referred to, and if the value is "0", the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to "AAH". However, if it is "1", the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command may be set to "ABH".

On the other hand, the display control device 114 recognizes that if the upper byte of the received command is "AAH" or "ABH", the command is a display variation pattern command (see S1403 in FIG. 29), and further. If the 0th bit of the upper byte of the command is "0", when the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol of the variation effect, the background color is controlled to be the normal color. (See S1728 in FIG. 32) On the other hand, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the variation pattern command for display is "1", the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a stop symbol of the variation effect. , The background color is controlled to be a special color (see S1727 in FIG. 32).

Here, in the continuous notice mode flag 223e, the value of the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the received hold count command is "1", and among the predetermined conditions described above (condition 3). When the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, among the variable effects (holding balls) held in the main control device 110 at that time, the variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set this time is satisfied. All the bits corresponding to (holding ball) are set to "1" (see S1119 to S1121 in FIG. 26). In (Condition 3), as described above, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for at least a part of the already reserved variable effect, and the game state after the continuous advance notice effect is performed is "off". Furthermore, it is a condition that the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which the permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "big hit". Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by satisfying (Condition 3), the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set is performed. By setting the effect mode as a special mode, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "off" as a result of the continuous advance notice effect set in the past, a new setting is made thereafter. Since the continuous advance notice effect is executed in a special mode, the player can be strongly expected to be a "big hit" by the special mode.

Further, since the effect mode of the continuous notice effect can be set by the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command, which is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode of the variation effect, the effect of the continuous notice effect can be set. It is not necessary to separately prepare a command for notifying the mode individually, and it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect with one command. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of commands notified from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of each command.

Next, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds), the instruction is instructed by the main control device 110. The normal reach variation mode is not set as it is, but the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0", the effect mode of the variation effect is set to one "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds revariation" mode (variation time: 25 seconds) and displayed. "AA81H" (or "AB81H") is set as the variation pattern command for use. The details of this "2-second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2-second re-variation" will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1" to "3", the variation effect is distributed to two pseudo variation effects. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1", the first effect is the "off variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) and the second effect is "1" as the effect mode of each pseudo variation effect. It is set to be in the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds), and "AA41H" (or "AB41H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "2", the first effect is the "disengagement fluctuation + slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds), and the second effect is the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds). Is set, and "AA42H" (or "AB42H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "3", the first effect is the "disengagement fluctuation +1.5 seconds extension" mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds), and the second effect is the "disengagement variation +1.5". It is set to be in the "second extension" mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds), and "AA43H" (or "AB43H") is set as the display variation pattern command.

In addition, as the effect mode of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the stop symbols of the variation effect corresponding to the display variation pattern command set according to FIG. 10 are "3", "4", and "4" in any case. It is set to the chance of 1 ”, and the content is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command. Here, even when one variation effect is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the stop symbol of each pseudo variation effect is set by this display stop symbol command. Then, in the present embodiment, the display variation symbol command is transmitted once for one variation effect (holding ball) even when it is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects. Then, the display control device 114 controls to display the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command in all the pseudo variation effects distributed in the one variation effect (holding ball). As a result, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, a plurality of pseudo-simulations distributed when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds). All the stop symbols of the fluctuation effect are displayed as chance eyes.

Therefore, even if one variation effect is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the player is made to perceive the pseudo variation effect as if it were a normal variation effect, and the chances are continuous as the stop symbol. It can be recognized that it is displayed. Further, since the display stop symbol command may be transmitted once for one variation effect (holding ball), it is necessary to set and transmit the display stop symbol command for each of a plurality of pseudo variation effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is distributed when the variation pattern is the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds). A mode of producing a pseudo variable effect will be described. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of a normal normal reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the normal reach variation mode, and FIG. 11A is a timing chart and a diagram of the normal normal reach variation mode. 11 (b) is a timing chart of a pseudo-variation effect effect mode in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA41H” (or “AB41H”), and FIG. 11 (c) shows the display variation pattern command. In FIG. 11 (d), the timing chart of the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect indicated by "AA42H" (or "AB42H"), the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA43H" (or "AB43H"). It is a timing chart of the production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect.

First, in the normal normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds), as shown in FIG. 11A, when the variation effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 has three modes of left, middle, and right. High-speed fluctuations of the symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) are started. The high-speed fluctuation is performed by displaying each of the symbols Z1 to Z3 so as to scroll at a high speed so that the player cannot see them. Then, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 1 second later (10 seconds after the start of the variation effect). At this time, in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, the same symbols are aligned on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110. The design is displayed. After that (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high speed fluctuation state to the low speed fluctuation state, and the player is asked. Then, on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, an effect is performed to show whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned. Then, 25 seconds after the start of the variation effect, the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped according to the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110 is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (b), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA41H" (or "AB41H") is first, the variation effect. Along with the start of, the first pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) as the first effect, and then the "disengagement variation +" is performed as the second effect. The second pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds).

Of these, the "disengagement fluctuation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is the "disengagement fluctuation" mode (variation) that is set when the "disengagement fluctuation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is instructed by the main controller 110. Time: 11 seconds), and as shown in FIG. 11 (b), a pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 on the left, middle, and right are started. , Z3 (see FIG. 4) The left symbol sequence Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the high-speed fluctuation of each is started. At this time, since the stop symbol is set as the chance eye, the symbol "3" is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. Next, 10 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the symbol "1" is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2. Then, 11 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the symbol "4" is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2. As a result, the first pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the "off-variation" mode with a fluctuation time of 11 seconds, and a chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol.

When the first pseudo-variation effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), immediately after that, the second pseudo-variation effect is performed in the "off variation + slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds). Will be. In this "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds), a pseudo variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (left, middle, and right) (left, middle, and right). (Refer to FIG. 4) When each high-speed fluctuation is started, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), as in the "off-range fluctuation" mode. Then, the symbol "3" is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. Then, 10 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation (21 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped for a moment, and then the symbols displayed in the right symbol row Z3 slide and change again. The sliding effect to start is performed for 3 seconds. Then, 13 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (24 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the symbol "1" is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2.

Due to this sliding effect, after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped for a moment, the fluctuation is started again, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that a special symbol is displayed in the right symbol row Z3. Further, when the chance eye symbol "3" is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2, the sliding effect is performed, and the chance eye symbol "1" is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2. When it is displayed, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player that the chance eye is displayed as the final stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that does not make the player bored. Further, since a sliding effect of 3 seconds is added to the "disengagement fluctuation" mode, the fluctuation time of the "disengagement fluctuation + sliding effect" mode is adjusted to be about 3 seconds longer than that of the "disengagement fluctuation" mode. be able to.

After the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped 14 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (25 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started), and the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2 is displayed. The symbol "4" is displayed. As a result, the second pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the mode of "off variation + slip effect" with a variation time of 14 seconds, and a chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol.

Here, the effect mode of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is determined based on a lottery performed in advance by the main control device 110 at the time of starting winning before the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Therefore, when the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode, the stop symbol becomes the reach symbol, and the continuous advance notice effect performed by displaying the chance eye is executed as it is. Can't. Therefore, in order to display the chance eye in the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3" and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol "1" within the time allocated to the normal reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a low speed, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are not aligned, which gives a strange impression to the player. Will be given. Further, within the time allotted to the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3", the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol "3" to display the reach symbol, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the row Z2 is stopped, if the right symbol row Z3 is slid and the variable display is performed again to display the symbol "1" on the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, the production will be very delayed, and the player will get bored. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the normal reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the variation determined by the main control device 110. Even when the effect mode of the effect is the normal reach variation mode, the execution of the continuous notice effect can be easily set, and thus the player can have a feeling of expectation due to the continuous advance notice effect. ..

Further, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is a normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds) having a long variation time, the fluctuation time is changed. Among them, it is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects. Then, in each pseudo fluctuation effect, chance eyes (the symbols on the middle line L2 are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left) are displayed as the stop symbols, so that the chance eyes are displayed at short time intervals. Can be displayed. Therefore, as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, even if the normal reach variation mode having a longer variation time is instructed by the main control device 110, the player is informed that the chance eyes are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the expectation of the player can be gradually increased each time the chance is displayed.

In addition, as an effect mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect, not only the "off-variation" mode in which the fluctuation time is 11 seconds, but also the "off-variation +" in which the fluctuation time is 14 seconds longer than the "off-variation" mode by 3 seconds. A "slip effect" mode is prepared, and by combining these effect modes, the normal reach variation mode can be set without leaving the variation time within the variation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach variation mode. It can be divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (c), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA42H" (or "AB42H") is first described in the variation effect. At the same time as the start, the first pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement fluctuation + slip effect" mode (variation time: 14 seconds) as the first effect, and then the "disengagement" as the second effect. In the "variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

That is, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in this case is the variation time as compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" (or "AB41H") (see FIG. 11B). The order of the pseudo-variation effect performed in the "disengagement variation" mode of 11 seconds and the pseudo variation effect performed in the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode of 14 seconds is exchanged. As shown in FIG. 11 (c), when the display variation pattern command is "AA42H" (or "AB42H"), the "off variation" mode is such that the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" (or "AB41H"). ”), A pseudo-variation effect is performed at the same timing as the“ off-variation ”mode. Further, the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode when the display variation pattern command is "AA42H" (or "AB42H") is when the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" (or "AB41H"). A pseudo fluctuation effect is performed at the same timing as the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode.

As a result, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA42H" (or "AB42H") is also indicated by the display variation pattern command in "AA41H" (or "AB41H"). Similar to the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect, the normal reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the main control device 110 Even when the determined effect mode of the variation effect is the normal reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, even if the main control device 110 instructs the normal reach variation mode having a longer variation time as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the player is informed that the chance eyes are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the expectation of the player can be gradually increased each time the chance is displayed. Further, the normal reach variation mode can be assigned to two pseudo variation effects without leaving the variation time within the variation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach variation mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 (d), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA43H" (or "AB43H") is first described in the variation effect. Along with the start, as the first effect, the first pseudo-variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode of "disengagement variation + 1.5 seconds extension" (variation time: 12.5 seconds), and the first effect is Subsequently, as the second effect, the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the same "disengagement variation + 1.5 seconds extension" mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds) as the first effect. Will be. That is, in this case, the pseudo fluctuation effect of the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode is repeated twice.

In the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 11 (d), a pseudo fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and left / middle. -When high-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 on the right (see FIG. 4) is started, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are 1.5 seconds longer than in the case of the "disengagement fluctuation" mode. High speed fluctuation is performed. Then, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 10.5 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, and the symbol "3" of the chance eye is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. Then, 11.5 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the right symbol row Z2 is stopped, and after the symbol "1" of the chance eye is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2, 12. After 5 seconds, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2 displays the symbol "4" of the chance eye.

As a result, the first and second pseudo fluctuation effects are performed in the mode of "off variation + 1.5 seconds" with a variation time of 12.5 seconds, respectively, and chance eyes are displayed as stop symbols. In this way, the normal reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" (or "AB41H"). Similar to the pseudo variation effect effect mode shown in ()), even if the variation effect effect mode determined by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily executed. Can be set. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, since the chance eyes are continuously displayed at short time intervals, even if the main controller 110 instructs the normal reach variation mode having a longer variation time as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. , It is possible to easily make the player notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed, and each time the chance eyes are displayed, the expectation of the player can be gradually increased.

Further, since the time required for the pseudo fluctuation effect is adjusted by extending the time required for the high-speed fluctuation, the normal reach fluctuation mode is set within the fluctuation time (25 seconds) assigned to the normal reach fluctuation mode. It is possible to allocate the fluctuation time to two pseudo fluctuation effects without leaving any time. Then, for example, in the display control device 113, the image prepared for the "disengagement fluctuation" mode is used, and the image related to the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is extended for a time (1.5 seconds in this case). If control is performed so that only) is repeatedly displayed, the image subject to high-speed fluctuation is displayed in a state in which the symbol is difficult to see for the player. Therefore, the discontinuity of the symbol due to the repetition of the image. Can be suppressed from being recognized by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to separately prepare an image for the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode in addition to the image for the "disengagement fluctuation" mode, the storage capacity for storing the image for the fluctuation effect is increased. Can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, even when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), the main control device is the same as the normal reach variation mode. The super reach variation mode instructed by 110 is not set as it is, but the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0", the effect mode of the variation effect is set to one "2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second re-variation" mode (variation time: 40 seconds). “AA82H” (or “AB82H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. The details of this "2 second reduction super reach fluctuation + 2 second re-variation" will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1" to "3", the variation effect is distributed to two pseudo variation effects. Then, as the effect mode of each pseudo variation effect, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1", the first effect is the "off variation + 1 second extension" mode (variation time: 12 seconds), the second. The effect is set to be in the "displacement variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and "AA51H" (or "AB51H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When the values of the effect mode counter 223f are "2" and "3", the first effect is the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and the second effect is "disengagement variation + 1 second extension". (Variation time: 12 seconds), and "AA52H" (or "AB52H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When "AA82H", "AB82H", "AA51H", "AB51H", "AA52H", and "AB52H" are set as the display variation pattern commands, the stop symbol of the variation effect will be any of the above. Is also set at the chance of "3", "4", and "1", and the content thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is distributed when the variation pattern is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds). The production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect to be performed will be described. FIG. 12 is a timing chart of a normal super reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the super reach variation mode, and FIG. 12A shows a timing of the normal super reach variation mode. The chart, FIG. 12 (b) is a timing chart of the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by “AA51H” (or “AB51H”), and FIG. 12 (c) is the display variation. It is a timing chart of the production mode of the pseudo variation effect whose pattern command is indicated by "AA52H" (or "AB52H").

First, in the normal super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the variation effect is started in the same manner as in the normal normal reach variation mode (see FIG. 11 (a)). In the third symbol display device 81, when high-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) of left, middle, and right is started, the left symbol row Z1 is 9 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect. Is stopped, and one second later (10 seconds after the start of the variation effect), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped. At this time, the reach symbols are displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2 according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110. After that (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high speed fluctuation state to the low speed fluctuation state, and the player is asked. Then, after an effect of showing whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned is performed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, 40 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the middle is in accordance with the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110. The symbol sequence Z2 is stopped, and the stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110 is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (b), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA51H" (or "AB51H") is first, the variation effect. Along with the start of the first effect, the first pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode of "disengagement variation + 1 second extension" (variation time: 12 seconds), and then the second effect is " A second pseudo-variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds).

Of these, the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode (variation time: 12 seconds) is almost the same production mode as the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 seconds extension" mode (variation time: 12.5 seconds). However, as shown in FIG. 12B, a pseudo variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81, and each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) on the left, middle, and right. When the high-speed fluctuation is started, in the case of the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 seconds extension" mode, the high-speed fluctuations of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are performed 1.5 seconds longer than the "disengagement fluctuation" mode. On the other hand, in the case of the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode, the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is performed one second longer than in the "disengagement fluctuation" mode. Then, 10 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the symbol "3" of the chance eye is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2. After that, 11 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, the right symbol row Z2 is stopped, and after the chance eye symbol "1" is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2, 12 seconds after the start of high-speed fluctuation, the middle The symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the symbol "4" of the chance eye is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2.

As a result, the first pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the mode of "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" with a fluctuation time of 12 seconds, and a chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol. Further, also in the case of this "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode, the image prepared for the "disengagement fluctuation" mode is used in the display control device 113 as in the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode. If the control is performed so that the images related to the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are repeatedly displayed for the extended time (in this case, 1 second), the images related to the high-speed fluctuation will have the symbols for the player. Since it is displayed in a state where it is difficult to see, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the symbol due to repeating the image. In addition, by using the image prepared for the "disengagement fluctuation" mode and controlling so that the image related to the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is repeatedly displayed for the extended time, the time is controlled. The extension time can be set to any time as well as 1 second or 1.5 seconds. Furthermore, if one image for the "disengagement variation" mode is prepared, the variation effect can be performed in the "disengagement variation + 1 second extension" mode or the "disengagement variation + 1.5 second extension" mode, so that the image for the variation effect can be stored. It is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity for the operation.

When the first pseudo-variation effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 12B, immediately after that, the second pseudo-variation effect is performed in the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds). Will be. This "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds) is one of the effect modes used not only for the "reach variation with advance notice effect" mode but also for a normal variable effect without continuous advance notice effect. Yes, when the pseudo fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and the high-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) on the left, middle, and right is started, the high speed is increased. Two seconds after the start of the fluctuation (14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the high-speed fluctuation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves from the main display area Dm to the sub display area Ds, and the drama is displayed in the main display area Dm. One scene of, music promotion video, etc. is displayed, and if the reach pattern is displayed after the display is finished, a notice effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of transition to a big hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 22 seconds). Will be.

Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the display of the advance notice effect is terminated, and after the high-speed fluctuation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed again in the main display area Dm, 26 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation display (38 from the start of the fluctuation effect). (Seconds later), the left symbol row Z1 is stopped, the symbol "3" is displayed in the left symbol row Z1 on the middle line L2, and 27 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (after the fluctuation effect is started). (39 seconds later), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, and the symbol "1" is displayed in the right symbol row Z3 on the middle line L2. Then, 28 seconds after the start of the high-speed fluctuation (40 seconds after the fluctuation effect circuit), the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the symbol "4" is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 on the middle line L2. As a result, the second pseudo fluctuation effect is performed in the "displacement variation with advance notice effect" mode with a variation time of 28 seconds, and a chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol.

In this way, the super reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110. Even when is a super reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, even in the super reach fluctuation mode (variation time: 40 seconds) in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the normal reach fluctuation mode, as in the case of the normal reach fluctuation mode, two pseudo fluctuation effects are produced within the fluctuation time. It is distributed to. Then, in each pseudo fluctuation effect, chance eyes (the symbols on the middle line L2 are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left) are displayed as the stop symbols, so that the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Even if the super reach variation mode is instructed by the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the set variation effect, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed, and the chance eyes can be easily noticed. Each time the display is performed, the expectation of the player can be gradually increased.

In addition, as the production mode of the second pseudo fluctuation effect, the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode is set, and since the advance notice effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation, the pseudo change effect is performed according to the time required for the advance notice effect. It is possible to lengthen the time required for various fluctuation effects. In other words, when allocating a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as a super reach fluctuation mode to a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects, the time required for at least one pseudo fluctuation effect is set to be long. Therefore, while reducing the number of pseudo fluctuation effects, the super reach variation mode can be set without leaving the fluctuation time within the variation time (40 seconds) assigned to the super reach variation mode. It can be distributed to multiple pseudo fluctuation effects. Therefore, based on the lottery performed by the establishment of one start condition, the variation effect is usually performed once, but the pseudo variation effect is frequently performed by the distribution of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, if the advance notice effect is used in the "disappearance change with advance notice effect" mode or the "reach change with advance notice effect" mode, which is performed in the normal variable effect to which the continuous advance notice effect is not added, It is possible to make a continuous advance notice in a pseudo variable effect by using the data for the advance notice effect performed in the normal variable effect. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare data for the advance notice effect performed during the pseudo variable effect, so that the storage capacity for storing the data for the advance notice effect performed during the pseudo variable effect can be increased. It can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA52H" (or "AB52H") is first described in the variation effect. At the same time as the start, the first pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode of "disappearance with notice effect" (variation time: 28 seconds) as the first effect, and then "disengagement" is performed as the second effect. In the "variation + 1 second extension" mode (variation time: 12 seconds), the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81.

That is, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in this case is the variation time as compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is "AA51H" (or "AB51H") (see FIG. 12B). The order of the pseudo-variation effect performed in the 12-second "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode and the pseudo-variation effect performed in the "disengagement fluctuation with notice effect" mode of 28 seconds is changed. As shown in FIG. 12 (c), when the display variation pattern command is "AA52H" (or "AB52H"), the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode is such that the display variation pattern command is "AA51H". (Or "AB51H"), a pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode. Further, the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode when the display fluctuation pattern command is "AA52H" (or "AB52H") is when the display fluctuation pattern command is "AA51H" (or "AB51H"). A pseudo fluctuation effect is performed at the same timing as the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode.

As a result, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA52H" (or "AB52H") is also indicated by the display variation pattern command in "AA51H" (or "AB51H"). Similar to the production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect, the super reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the main control device 110 Even when the effect mode of the variation effect determined by is the super reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed even if the super reach variation mode is instructed by the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player step by step each time the chance is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. In the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, even when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds), it is the same as the normal reach variation mode and the super reach variation mode. In addition, instead of setting the special reach variation mode instructed by the main control device 110 as it is, the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set as follows according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. To do. That is, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0", one "2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second re-variation" mode (variation time: 50 seconds) is set as the effect mode of the variation effect. “AA83H” (or “AB83H”) is set as the display variation pattern command. The details of this "2-second shortened special reach variation + 2-second re-variation" will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1" to "3", the variation effect is distributed to three pseudo variation effects. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "1", the first effect is the "off variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) and the second effect is "1" as the effect mode of each pseudo variation effect. The mode of "displacement fluctuation" (variation time: 11 seconds) and the third effect are set to the mode of "displacement fluctuation with notice effect" (variation time: 28 seconds), and "AA61H" (or "AA61H" (or) as the display variation pattern command is set. "AB61H") is set. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "2", the first effect is the "displacement fluctuation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and the second effect is the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds). , The third effect is set to be "off variation" (variation time: 11 seconds), and "AA62H" (or "AB62H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "3", the first effect is the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and the second effect is the "disappearance variation" mode (variation time: 11). Seconds), the third effect is set to be "off variation" (variation time: 11 seconds), and "AA63H" (or "AB63H") is set as the display variation pattern command. When "AA83H", "AB83H", "AA61H" to "AA63H", and "AB61H" to "AB63H" are set as the display variation pattern commands, the stop symbol of the variation effect will be any of them, as described above. Is also set at the chance of "3", "4", and "1", and the content thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop symbol command.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is distributed when the variation pattern is the special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds). The production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect to be performed will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart of a normal special reach variation mode and an effect mode of a pseudo variation effect distributed from the special reach variation mode, and FIG. 13A is a timing of the normal special reach variation mode. The chart, FIG. 13 (b) is a timing chart of the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA61H" (or "AB61H"), and FIG. 13 (c) is the display variation. In FIG. 13 (d), the timing chart of the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the pattern command is "AA62H" (or "AB62H"), the display variation pattern command is "AA63H" (or "AB63H"). ) Is a timing chart of the production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), the normal special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds) includes a normal normal reach variation mode (see FIG. 11 (a)) and a super reach variation mode (FIG. 12 (a)). )), When the fluctuation effect is started and the high-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the left, middle, and right is started in the third symbol display device 81. The left symbol row Z1 is stopped 9 seconds after the start of the variation effect, and the right symbol row Z3 is stopped 1 second later (10 seconds after the start of the variation effect). At this time, the reach symbols are displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2 according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110. After that (for example, 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped, that is, 13 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is shifted from the high-speed fluctuation state to the low-speed fluctuation state, and the player is asked. Then, after the effect of showing whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned is performed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, 50 seconds after the start of the variable effect, the middle is in accordance with the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110. The symbol sequence Z2 is stopped, and the stop symbol according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110 is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 13 (b), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA61H" (or "AB61H") is first, the variation effect. Along with the start of the first effect, the first pseudo-variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “disengagement variation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and after the end of the first effect, As the second effect, a second pseudo-variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and after the end of the second effect, "3rd effect" is further performed. A third pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "displacement variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds).

Of these, the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds) is performed as the first pseudo variation effect when, for example, the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" (or "AB41H"). It is the same effect mode as the "displacement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and a pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing. In addition, the "displacement variation with advance notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds) is performed as a second pseudo variation effect when, for example, the display variation pattern command is "AA51H" (or "AB51H"). It is the same effect mode as the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode (variation time: 28 seconds), and a pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing.

As a result, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 has a special reach variation mode (variation time) in which the variation time is longer than the normal reach variation mode and the super reach variation mode. : 50 seconds), it is distributed to three pseudo fluctuation effects within the fluctuation time. Then, in each pseudo fluctuation effect, chance eyes (the symbols on the middle line L2 are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left) are displayed as the stop symbols, so that the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Even if the main control device 110 instructs the special reach variation mode as the variation pattern of the set variation effect, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed, and the chance eyes can be easily noticed. Each time the display is performed, the expectation of the player can be gradually increased.

In addition, as the third pseudo-variation effect effect mode, the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode is set, and the advance notice effect is performed during the high-speed fluctuation. It is possible to lengthen the time required for various fluctuation effects. Therefore, as in the case of the super reach variation mode, the special reach variation mode is distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, the main control device 110 Even when the determined effect mode of the variation effect is the special reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, when allocating a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time such as a special reach fluctuation mode to a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects, it is possible to set a long time required for at least one pseudo fluctuation effect. Therefore, while reducing the number of pseudo-variation effects, the special reach variation mode can be set a plurality of times within the variation time (50 seconds) assigned to the special reach variation mode without leaving the variation time. It can be distributed to the pseudo fluctuation production of. Therefore, based on the lottery performed by the establishment of one start condition, the variation effect is usually performed once, but the pseudo variation effect is frequently performed by the distribution of the pseudo variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 13 (c), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA62H" (or "AB62H") is first described in the variation effect. At the same time as the start, as the first effect, the first pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and after the end of the first effect, the first effect is subsequently performed. As the second effect, the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode of "displacement variation with advance notice effect" (variation time: 28 seconds), and after the end of the second effect, the third effect is further performed. As a result, the third pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the “disengagement fluctuation” mode (variation time: 11 seconds). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 14 (c), the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect in which the display variation pattern command is indicated by "AA63H" (or "AB63H") is, first, the start of the variation effect. At the same time, as the first effect, the first pseudo-variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the mode of "displacement variation with notice effect" (variation time: 28 seconds), and after the end of the first effect, it continues. As the second effect, the second pseudo variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement variation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds), and after the end of the second effect, as the third effect. A third pseudo fluctuation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "disengagement fluctuation" mode (variation time: 11 seconds).

That is, in these cases, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect is the variation time as compared with the case where the display variation pattern command is "AA61H" (or "AB61H") (see FIG. 13B). The order of the two pseudo-variation effects performed in the "off-variation" mode of 11 seconds and the pseudo-variation effects performed in the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode of 28 seconds has been changed. As shown in FIG. 13 (c) or (d), the display variation pattern command is "AA62H" (or "AB62H") and "AA63H" (or "AB63H"). In the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode, a pseudo variation effect is performed at the same timing as the "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode when the display variation pattern command is "AA61H" (or "AB61H"). Further, in the case where the display variation pattern command is "AA62H" (or "AB62H") and the case where "AA63H" (or "AB63H") is "off variation", the display variation pattern command is "AA61H". (Or, a pseudo fluctuation effect is performed at the same timing as the "disengagement fluctuation" mode in the case of (or "AB61H").

As a result, the display variation pattern command is "AA62H" (or "AB62H") and "AA63H" (or "AB63H"), and the display variation pattern command is "AA62H" (or "AB63H"). Similar to the production mode of the pseudo fluctuation effect shown by "AA61H" (or "AB61H"), the special reach variation mode is divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects, and as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. Since the chance eyes are displayed, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even when the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is the special reach variation mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the continuous advance notice production. Further, the player can easily notice that the chance eyes are continuously displayed even if the main control device 110 instructs the special reach variation mode as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. It is possible to raise the expectation of the player step by step each time the chance is displayed.

Then, referring to FIG. 14, "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode (variation time: 25 seconds), "2 seconds shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode (variation time: 40 seconds),. The details of the "2-second shortened special reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode (variation time: 50 seconds) will be described. FIG. 14 (a) is a timing chart of the “2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second re-variation” mode performed by the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 14 (b) is “2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 seconds”. It is a timing chart of the "re-variation" aspect, and FIG. 14C is a timing chart of the "2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second re-variation" aspect. Further, in FIGS. 14 (a) to 14 (c), a normal normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds), a super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), and a special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds) are shown, respectively. The timing chart for seconds) is also shown. The timings of these normal normal reach variation modes, super reach variation modes, and special reach variation modes are the same as the timings described with reference to FIGS. 11 (a), 12 (a), and 13 (a), respectively. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the "2 seconds shortened normal reach variation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode (variation time: 25 seconds), as described above, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is used. Display variation in the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, which is set when the normal reach variation mode (variation time: 25 seconds) and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0". This is an effect mode corresponding to the pattern command "AA81H" (or "AB81H"). That is, when the display fluctuation pattern command "AA81H" (or "AB81H") is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 controls the display control device 81 to "reduce 2 seconds normal reach fluctuation +2". The fluctuation effect is performed in the "second re-variation" mode.

In the "2 seconds shortened normal reach variation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode (variation time: 25 seconds), as shown in FIG. 14A, when the variation effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is left / middle. -High-speed fluctuation of each of the three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 on the right (see FIG. 4) is started. Then, in the normal normal reach fluctuation, the high-speed fluctuation of the left symbol row Z1 is performed for 9 seconds, but in the "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode, the time is shortened by 1 second and the fluctuation effect is started. The left symbol column Z1 is stopped 8 seconds after the operation. Then, 1 second later (9 seconds after the start of the variation effect), the right symbol row Z3 is stopped. At this time, in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z2, the same symbols are aligned on at least one of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 4) according to the stop symbol command from the main control device 110. The design is displayed.

Next, in the normal normal reach fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 shifts from the high-speed fluctuation to the low-speed fluctuation 3 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped (that is, 13 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect). In the "second reduction normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode, the time is further shortened by 1 second, and 2 seconds after the right symbol row Z3 is stopped (that is, 11 seconds after the start of the fluctuation effect), the middle symbol row Z2 Slow fluctuations are started. After that, an effect of showing the player whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is performed for 12 seconds, which is the same as the normal normal reach variation, and 23 seconds after the start of the variation effect. The symbol string Z2 is stopped, and the detached reach symbol is temporarily displayed. That is, from the start of the variation effect to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach variation effect is performed in which the variation time is shortened by 2 seconds as compared with the normal normal reach variation mode.

Immediately after that, the re-variation in which all the symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are varied and displayed again so that the contents can be slid in a visible manner is generated by shortening the normal reach variation mode for 2 seconds. It takes place between. In this way, by performing the re-variation after the normal reach variation mode is performed, the player is made to recognize the contents of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the expectation that the chance eye is displayed is higher. You can have it. In addition, the re-variation may start the fluctuation again so that only a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 slides in a manner in which the contents can be visually recognized.

Further, in this case, the re-variation is performed while the background symbol and other display symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped are maintained. As a result, by displaying the re-variation, it is possible to give the player a strong expectation that some kind of effect will be performed following the reach variation effect.

Then, 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the chance eyes ("3", "4", "1" in order from the left) are stopped. The symbol) is displayed on the middle line L2.

In this way, in the normal reach variation mode, the period during which the high-speed fluctuation is performed is shortened, the revariation is performed in the shortened time, and the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol. Therefore, the main control device 110 determines. Within the time allotted to the normal reach variation mode, it is possible to reliably perform the continuous advance notice effect. Further, when the time required for the normal reach variation mode is shortened by removing the image from the image prepared for the normal reach variation mode and displaying the image, a high-speed fluctuation that is difficult for the player to see during the shortened period is generated. Since it is the displayed period, it is possible to suppress the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the variation effect due to the removal of the image.

Further, the effect mode of the variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is determined in advance based on the lottery performed by the main control device 110 at the time of starting and winning before the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. When the effect mode of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is the normal reach variation mode, the stop symbol becomes the reach symbol, and the continuous advance notice effect performed by displaying the chance eye is executed as it is. I can't. Therefore, in order to display the chance eye in the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3" and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol "1" within the time allocated to the normal reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a low speed, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are not aligned, which gives a strange impression to the player. Will be given. Further, within the time allotted to the normal reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3", the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol "3" to display the reach symbol, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the row Z2 is stopped, if the right symbol row Z3 is slid and the variable display is performed again to display the symbol "1" on the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, the production will be very delayed, and the player will get bored.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the reach symbol is displayed according to the normal reach variation mode, the re-variation is performed and the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol. Therefore, the effect of the variation effect determined by the main control device 110 is produced. Even when the mode is the normal reach variation mode, it is possible to easily set the execution of the continuous advance notice effect. Further, even if the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the variation effect can be performed in the normal reach variation mode, so that the player is satisfied by performing the variation effect in the reach variation mode that the player is looking forward to. be able to.

In addition, since the re-variation is performed after the off-reach symbol is displayed depending on the normal reach variation mode, the player is expected to perform some effect even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed due to the normal reach variation mode. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the re-variation, the continuous advance notice effect can be performed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

The "2-second shortened super reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode (variation time: 40 seconds) is a variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, as described above. Is the super reach variation mode (variation time: 40 seconds), and is set when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0", and is displayed in the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. This is an effect mode corresponding to the variable pattern command "AA82H" (or "AB82H"). That is, when the display fluctuation pattern command "AA82H" (or "AB82H") is received by the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 controls the display control device 114 to "reduce the super reach by 2 seconds." The fluctuation effect is performed in the mode of "+2 seconds re-variation".

Further, the "2-second shortened special reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode (variation time: 50 seconds) was instructed by the main control device 110 in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect was set, as described above. In the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, which is set when the variation pattern is the special reach variation mode (variation time: 50 seconds) and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is "0". , This is an effect mode corresponding to the display variation pattern command "AA83H" (or "AB83H"). That is, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command "AA83H" (or "AB83H"), the display control device 114 controls the display control device 114 to "2 seconds reduction special reach variation". The fluctuation effect is performed in the mode of "+2 seconds re-variation".

These "2-second shortened super reach fluctuation + 2-second re-variation" mode (variation time: 40 seconds) and "2-second shortened special reach fluctuation + 2-second re-variation" mode (variation time: 50 seconds) are shown in FIG. 14B and FIG. As shown in (c), the timing from the start of the fluctuation effect to the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed at the same timing as the "2 second shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 second revariation" mode. That is, the time related to the high-speed fluctuation of the left symbol row Z1 is shortened by 1 second as compared with the normal super reach fluctuation mode or the special reach fluctuation mode, and the left symbol row Z1 is stopped 8 seconds after the fluctuation effect is started. .. Further, the time from the stop of the right symbol row Z3 to the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is further shortened by 1 second as compared with the normal super reach fluctuation mode or the special reach fluctuation mode, and the right symbol row Two seconds after Z3 is stopped (that is, 11 seconds after the start of the variation effect), the low-speed variation of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is started. Then, the effect of showing the player whether or not the jackpot symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is 27 seconds, which is the same as the normal super reach variation mode, or the normal special reach variation mode. It is performed for 37 seconds, which is the same as the above, and 38 seconds or 48 seconds after the start of the variation effect, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and the detached reach symbol is displayed once. That is, from the start of the variation effect to the stop of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach variation effect is performed in which the variation time is shortened by 2 seconds as compared with the normal super reach variation mode or the special reach variation mode.

In addition, immediately after the reach fluctuation effect is performed, the contents of all the symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be visually recognized, as in the mode of "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation". The re-variation, which causes the variation to be displayed again in a slippery manner, is performed during the two seconds caused by shortening the super reach variation mode or the special reach variation mode. In addition, the re-variation may start the fluctuation again so that only a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 slides in a manner in which the contents can be visually recognized. Then, 40 seconds or 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped according to the stop command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the chance eyes ("3" and "4" in order from the left) are used as the stop symbols. The symbol "1") is displayed on the middle line L2.

In this way, also in the super reach variation mode or the special reach variation mode, the period during which the high-speed fluctuation is performed is shortened, the revariation is performed in the shortened time, and the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol. Therefore, it is possible to reliably perform the continuous advance notice effect within the time allocated to the super reach variation mode or the special reach variation by the main control device 110. In addition, the same effect as when the "2-second shortened normal reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode is set can be obtained.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown). The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp processing device is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process S1002, The command is analyzed by the processing of S1005, S1007, and S1010, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S1003 in FIG. 25), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1203 in FIG. 27).

The display control device 114 controls the variable display (variable effect) and the continuous advance notice effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have. The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 and a door solenoid 87a are connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the MPU 231 controls the opening / closing of the door 87 (excitation of the door solenoid 87a) according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231, and is a distribution number counter 233a, a first effect register 233b, a second effect register 233c, and a third effect. It has a register 233d.

The distribution number counter 233a distributes one variation effect into a plurality of pseudo variation effects based on the display variation pattern command, and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect. It is a counter for counting the number of times of execution of a typical fluctuation effect. When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 sets a pseudo-variation distribution process for setting the effect mode of the variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command. (See FIGS. 32 and 33), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set.

Then, in the case of being distributed to three pseudo variation effects (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are "AA61H" to "AA63H" and "AB61H" to "AB63H"), the value of the distribution number counter 233a. Is set to "2" (see S1707 in FIG. 32). Further, when the command is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects (for example, the display fluctuation pattern commands are "AA41H" to "AA43H", "AB41H" to "AB43H", "AA51H" to "AA52H", and "AB51H". (When it is "AB52H"), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to "1" (see S1714 and S1719 in FIG. 33). In addition, when it is not possible to distribute to a pseudo variation effect (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are "AA81H" to "AA83H" and "AB81H" to "AB83H"), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to ". It is set to "0" (see S1704 in FIG. 32).

The display control device 114 refers to the distribution number counter 233a each time the variation effect is completed, and if the value is other than 0, executes the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 34), and should perform the next operation. The effect mode of the pseudo variation effect is set, and the pseudo variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the newly set effect mode. Further, the distribution number counter 223a is updated every time the effect mode of the variation effect is set in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 34) (see S1809 in FIG. 34). The update of the distribution number counter 233a is performed by decrementing the value by 1 if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is other than 0, and holding the value if the value of the distribution counter 233a is 0. As a result, the effect mode is set and the number of pseudo variation effects displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be counted, and the distribution number counter 233a set when the display variation pattern command is received. A pseudo variation effect of the number of times according to the value of can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are 1-byte registers for setting the effect mode of the variation effect, and the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command. In the pseudo-variation distribution process (see FIG. 32 or FIG. 33) executed when this is done, each register is set based on the received display variation pattern command.

At this time, when it is divided into three pseudo variation effects (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are "AA61H" to "AA63H" and "AB61H" to "AB63H"), the first pseudo variation effect is performed. The effect mode of the variable effect is set in the third effect register 233d, the effect mode of the second pseudo variation effect is set in the second effect register 233c, and the effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect is the first. 1 It is set in the effect register 233b. When the command is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects (for example, the display fluctuation pattern commands are "AA41H" to "AA43H", "AB41H" to "AB43H", "AA51H" to "AA52H", "AB51H" to " In the case of "AB52H"), the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect is set in the second effect register 233c, and the effect mode of the second pseudo variation effect is set in the first effect register 233b. .. Further, when it is not possible to distribute to a pseudo variation effect (for example, when the display variation pattern commands are "AA81H" to "AA83H" and "AB81H" to "AB83H"), the effect mode of the variation effect is the first. It is set in the effect register 233b.

Then, the first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d set in the pseudo-variable distribution process (see FIG. 32 or FIG. 33) are the variable effect setting process (see FIG. 34). Referred to in the above, the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to each register is set according to the value of the register. For example, when the values of the first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are set to "10H", the "disappearance variation" mode is used as the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the registers. When it is set and set to "11H", the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode is set, and when it is set to "12H", the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode is set, and "13H". When set to, the "displacement variation + slip effect" mode is set, and when set to "14H", the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode is set. Further, when the values of the first effect register 233b, the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d are set to "21H", the mode of "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds revariation" is set, and "22H" is set. When set to "2 seconds shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode, and when set to "23H", "2 seconds shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" mode is set. Will be done.

In addition, the work RAM 233 has, as flags not shown, an effect permission flag indicating whether or not the effect is permitted, a variation start flag indicating whether or not the variation effect should be started, and a variation indicating whether or not the variation effect is in progress. It has a medium flag and a stop flag indicating whether or not to stop the fluctuation display. The effect permission flag is turned on when the effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 29), and the power is cut off. Turns off (not shown). The fluctuation start flag is turned on when a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the mode of the fluctuation effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 is received from the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1404 in FIG. 29), and the third symbol When the variation effect is started on the display device 81, it is turned off (see S1603 in FIG. 31). The changing flag is turned on when the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1604 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the variation effect is stopped (see S1611 in FIG. 31). Further, the stop flag is turned on when a stop command instructing the stop of the variation effect is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1406 in FIG. 29), and the variation effect is stopped. Is turned off (see S1611 in FIG. 31).

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data for production such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing data for variable effect after decompression (hereinafter, referred to as “variable effect data”) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the video RAM 234 stores the contents of the fluctuation effect data in correspondence with the elapsed time from the start to the end of the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to extract the variation effect data corresponding to the elapsed time (variation elapsed time) from the start of the variation effect.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231 and the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the display data 81. It is to be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 20).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 15 to 22. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899, 9, 99, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a jackpot lottery accompanying the start of the variation effect, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37, a variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. are executed. (S104), then, the start winning process associated with the winning of the first ball opening 64 is executed (S105). Then, based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation processing of S104, the probability variation setting process for controlling the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 between the high probability state (probability variation state) and the low probability state (normal state) is executed. (S106). The details of the variation processing, the start winning processing, and the probability variation setting processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16, 18, and 19, respectively.

After executing the probability change setting process, the launch control process is executed (S107), and other processes that are periodically executed are executed (S108) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball launch is turned on on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of determining / off. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the variation processing (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a variation process (S104) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S201). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110) is larger than 0 (S203). If the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is 0 (S203: No), this process ends as it is. If the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is not 0 (S203: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is subtracted by 1 (S204), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area. Is shifted (S205). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S206). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S207). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time elapses. If not (S207: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S208).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S207: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S209). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 determines the first probability variation big hit after the big hit ( A symbol with a maximum number of rounds that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds (15R probability variation jackpot) or a second probability variation jackpot (a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds) A symbol or a symbol that becomes a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) is determined. In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the first probability variation jackpot is reached after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the second probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED is lit when the time saving jackpot is reached. Turn on the LED and the blue LED. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S209, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. The command is set (S210). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 114. The third symbol display device 81 stops the fluctuation when the fluctuation time elapses, and when the stop command is received, the fluctuation display of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation start process (S206) executed in the variation process (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In this fluctuation start processing, a big hit lottery (win / fail determination) of "big hit" or "missing" is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 and the first 3 The variation effect pattern performed by the symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S206), first, the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) is set according to the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10. That is, if it is determined whether or not the probability changing flag 203b is on (S301) and the probability changing flag 203b is off (S301: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the probability change state, that is, in a low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability is set as the jackpot random number table (S302), and the process proceeds to S304. On the other hand, if the probabilistic change flag 203b is on (S301: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change state, that is, it is in a high probability state. (S303), the process proceeds to S304.

Then, in the processing of S304, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area and the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number table set by the processing of S301 to S303 are used. A jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is performed is performed based on the value.

As described above, with respect to the first hit random number counter C1 counted in the range of 0 to 899, the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a set when the probability changing flag 203b is off has three random numbers to be jackpots. The value "7,307,582" of is stored, and it becomes a big hit with a probability of 1/300. On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b set when the probability changing flag 203b is on, the random number value “28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276” is 30 jackpots. , 298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is stored. It is a big hit with a higher probability of / 30 than the low probability state.

In the processing of S304, each of these big hit random number values is compared with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area, and when they match. , Determined to be a big hit. That is, when the probability changing flag 203b is off and the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state (not during the probability change), between the values of the three big hit random numbers and the value of the first hit random number counter C1. On the other hand, when the probability changing flag 203b is on and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (probability changing), the value of the random number that is the jackpot of 30 and the random number counter C1 per first are compared. A comparison is made with the value. Therefore, when the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (so-called probabilistic change), the lottery process takes a long time.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S304 (S304: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the jackpot type is determined. Whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot or second probability variation jackpot) is determined (S305). Here, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, when the value is 4 to 9, it is determined that the probability variation jackpot (first probability variation jackpot or second probability variation jackpot).

Then, when it is determined that it is a probability change jackpot (S305: Yes), the probability change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S306), and further, the probability change during continuous notice determination flag 203c is turned on. (S307), the process proceeds to S310. When the probability change start flag is turned on by the process of S306, the variation process (see S104 of FIG. 15) and the start winning process (see FIG. 15) in which the variation start process is performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In the probability change setting process (see S106 and FIG. 19 in FIG. 15) executed after (see S105), the probability change in-probability flag 203b is turned on, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to the "high probability state" (so-called probability change). Set. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process is the probability change jackpot, the probability change flag 203b is not immediately turned on, but the probability change flag 203b is turned on after the start winning process.

As a result, in one timer interrupt process, the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start process is performed is maintained at least during the start winning process. Therefore, in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, the game at the time when the jackpot lottery is performed in the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the permission determination is made. The state (high probability state or low probability state) can be reflected. Therefore, when selecting the jackpot random number table used in the permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, it is necessary to accurately grasp the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery performed by the fluctuation start process. it can.

Further, as described above in the description of the probabilistic change in progress flag 203c for continuous notice determination with reference to FIG. 5, the jackpot determination in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect executed when the start prize is detected in the start prize process. Since the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c may be used (see S408 in FIG. 18), the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination whose setting is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination is set. There is a possibility that the game will deviate from the original state (that is, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 estimated at the time when the jackpot lottery accompanying the start of the variation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the variation start process). By turning on the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203c by the processing of S307, the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203c can be set to be turned on based on the jackpot lottery result by the processing of S305. As a result, even if the jackpot determination is simply performed using the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c in the start winning process, the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the starting winning is performed in the variable start process. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be estimated without any problem by the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is not (that is, the time saving jackpot) as a result of the processing of S305 (S305: No), the probability variation end flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S308). Further, the continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203c is turned off (S309), and the process proceeds to S310. When the probability change end flag is turned on by the process of S308, the variation process (see S104 of FIG. 15) and the start winning process (see FIG. 15) in which the variation start process is performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In the probability change setting process (see S106 and FIG. 19 of FIG. 15) executed after S105), the probability change in progress flag 203b is turned off, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the “low probability state”. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process is a time-saving jackpot, the probability change flag 203b is not immediately turned off, but the probability change flag 203b is turned off after the start winning process.

As a result, the probability change start flag is turned on by the process of S306, and the permission determination is performed in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, as in the case where the probability change in progress flag 203b is turned on in the probability change setting process. Since the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) at the time when the jackpot lottery is performed can be reflected in the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time, in the start winning process. When selecting the jackpot random number table used in the permission determination of the continuous notice effect, it can be performed after accurately grasping the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery performed by the fluctuation start processing.

Further, since the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203c is turned off by the processing of S309, the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203c can be set to off based on the jackpot lottery result by the processing of S305. Similar to the case where the probabilistic change flag 203c for continuous notice determination is turned on, even if the jackpot determination is simply performed using the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c in the start winning process, the variation corresponding to the start winning The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the jackpot lottery of the effect is performed in the fluctuation start process can be estimated without any problem by the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination.

In the process of S310, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In this process, the transition state after the jackpot set by the first hit type counter C2, that is, the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is one of the high probability states after the jackpot, is shifted or another. The display mode (LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is based on whether the state shifts to the high probability state (second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)) or the low probability state (time saving jackpot). Lighting state) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set. Of the numerical values 0 to 9 of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "0, 1, 2, 3", the probability shifts to the low probability state (time saving jackpot) thereafter, and in the case of "4,5". After that, it shifts to the high probability state (second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)), and in the case of "6,7,8,9", thereafter, the high probability state (first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)) )).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S311). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. To. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

If it is determined in the process of S304 that it is not a big hit (S304: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S312). In the process of S312, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. It is set whether the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a front-rear reach, a reach other than the front-rear reach, or a complete loss. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S313), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the disengaged symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S311, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, etc. is confirmed based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the fluctuation time of.

When it is determined by the processing of S304 that the hit is not a big hit, the probability change start flag (not shown) and the probability change end flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 are maintained off, which are the initial values. As a result, the value of the probabilistic change flag 203b is maintained in the probabilistic change setting process executed later. Therefore, once the probability changing flag 203b is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "high probability state", the "high probability state" is maintained until the next time-saving jackpot occurs. Further, when the probability changing flag 203b is turned off and the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "low probability state", the "probability change jackpot (first probability variation jackpot or second probability variation jackpot)" is " "Low probability state" is maintained.

After the processing of S311 or the processing of S313 is completed, the fluctuation pattern command is set according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the processing of S311 or S313 (S314), and is set in the processing of S310 or S312. A stop symbol command is set according to the stopped symbol (S315). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop symbol commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S701 of the main process (FIG. 22). To. Then, when the processing of S315 is completed, the process returns to the variable processing.

Next, the start winning process executed in the process of S105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. That is, the first ball entry switch (not shown) provided corresponding to the first ball entry port 64 by the process of S401 executed in the timer interrupt process of 1 (the first timer interrupt process) is After it is detected that it is off, the process of S401 executed in the subsequent timer interrupt process (second timer interrupt process) detects that the first entry switch is on, and the timer continues. When it is detected by the process of S401 executed in the interrupt process (third timer interrupt process) that the first ball slot switch is on, the ball is won in the first ball slot 64. Detect that. As a result, when the output of the first ball entry switch fluctuates due to the influence of noise, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of winning a ball. Since the timer interrupt process is executed at intervals of 2 milliseconds, even if the winning ball to the first ball opening 64 is detected over the three timer interrupt processes, the winning ball is not detected. Does not occur.

Next, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a (the hold count N of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110) is the upper limit value. (In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than 4) (S402). Then, is there no prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of balls on hold is not N <4 (S402: No). , Skip the subsequent processing (addition processing of hold count N, acquisition processing of various counters, determination processing of whether to allow start of continuous advance notice effect, hold count command generation processing, etc.) and proceed to timer interrupt processing. Return. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the number of holds N <4 (S402: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is incremented by 1. (S403) Further, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S103 is set to the first of the empty hold areas of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 203. Store in the area (S404).

Then, in the processing of S405 to S420 following the processing of S404, the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 is started based on the values of various counters stored in the empty holding area of the holding ball storage area by the processing of S404. Execute the permission judgment process.

In the permission determination process for starting the continuous advance notice effect, first, the jackpot that determines whether or not the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area indicates a jackpot by the process of S404. In order to set the random number table, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is ON (S405). Then, when the value of the probability changing during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination is not on, that is, is off (S405: No), the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is the variation start process. The first random number counter C1 stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area is shifted to the execution area as the hold ball is consumed, and the fluctuation starts at the time when it is performed (that is, by the processing of S404). Since it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low-probability state at the time of the jackpot lottery in the process), the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a is set as the jackpot random number table (S406).

On the other hand, when the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on (S405: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the value of the probability changing flag 203b is on (S407). When the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on (S405: Yes) and the value of the probability changing flag 203b is on (S407: Yes), the start winning prize detected by the processing of S401 It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery for the variable effect corresponding to is performed in the variable start process (see FIG. 17), and at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, , S405 to S420), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state, so a simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is set as the jackpot random number table (S408). Further, when the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on (S405: Yes) and the value of the probability changing flag 203b is off (S407: No), the start winning prize detected by the processing of S401 It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery for the variable effect corresponding to is performed in the variable start process (see FIG. 17), and at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect (that is, , S405 to S420), the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state, so a high probability jackpot random number table 202b is set as the jackpot random number table (S409).

Then, by the processing of S406, S408, and S409, one of the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a, the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c, and the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b is used. By comparing each value of the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number table with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area by the processing of S404, It is determined whether or not the first hit random number counter C1 indicates a big hit (S410).

That is, in the jackpot determination by the processing of S410, the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the processing of S401 is performed in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 17). If it is presumed to exist, the values of the three big hit random numbers set by the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the first random number counter C1 stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area by the processing of S404. The values of are compared, and if those values match, it is judged as a big hit.

Further, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is performed in the variable start process, and the continuous advance notice effect is started. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high-probability state at the time of the permission determination, the value of 10 random numbers that will be the jackpot set by the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c and the free hold of the hold ball storage area by the processing of S404 The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the area is compared, and when those values match, it is determined as a big hit.

Further, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is performed in the variable start process, and the continuous advance notice effect is started. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of the permission determination, the value of 30 random numbers that will be the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability and the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area by the processing of S404 The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in is compared, and when those values match, it is determined as a big hit.

As described above, whether or not to allow the variation processing (see S104 and FIG. 16 in FIG. 15) including the variation start processing (see S206 and FIG. 17 in FIG. 16) in which the jackpot lottery and the like are performed, and the start of the continuous advance notice effect. The start winning process (see S105 and FIG. 18 in FIG. 15) in which the determination is made is executed in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds. As a result, when both the start of the variation effect and the winning of the ball to the first entry port 64 are detected in one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery of the variation start process and the continuous notice in the start winning process Both the permission determination for the start of the production will be executed. In particular, in the high probability state, the hit probability of the second symbol is also increased so that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64, and the fluctuation effect is generally suspended. Since the fluctuation time is set short in order to consume the reserved ball in a short time, the start timing of the fluctuation effect increases. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state, the chance of detecting both the start of the fluctuation effect and the winning of the ball to the first ball entry port 64 in one timer interrupt process is higher than in the normal state. Will occur frequently, and in the timer interrupt processing, there is a high possibility that both the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation start processing and the permission determination of the start of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning processing will be executed.

Then, when the jackpot lottery in the fluctuation start process is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (so-called probabilistic change), as described with reference to FIG. 17, the first hit stored in the execution area. Since the value of the random number counter C1 and the value of each of the 30 random numbers stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b are compared, the lottery process takes a long time. If the result of the lottery is out of order, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and one final stop symbol before and after the reach symbol are generated after the reach is generated, as a process of subsequently determining the stop pattern at the time of the outlier. Compare the value of the random number that becomes "reach out of front and back" that stops only by the difference, and the value of the random number that becomes "reach other than out of front and back" that the final stop symbol stops outside before and after the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Since the processing is performed (see S312 in FIG. 17), further processing is required.

On the other hand, in the process of S410 of the start winning process, the value of the counter C1 per first random number stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area by the process of S404 is stored in the jackpot random number table 202b at high probability 30 Compared with each random number value of, a lot of processing time is required for the processing as well as the big hit lottery. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability change is in progress) and a lottery (win / fail determination) process is performed in connection with the start of the fluctuation effect in one timer interrupt process, the one timer is used. A start prize is further detected in the interrupt process, and the jackpot determination by the process of S410 in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect is stored in the value of the first random number counter C1 and the high probability jackpot random number table 202b. When performed by comparing each random value, the processing time of the jackpot lottery and the determination of permission to start the continuous advance notice effect is the interval at which the timer interrupt processing is executed (for example, 2 milliseconds). There is a possibility that one of the timer interrupt processes cannot be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a start winning prize is detected by the process of S401, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start prize is performed in the variation start process. If it is presumed that there is a pachinko machine 10 and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect, each of the 10 random numbers stored in the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c and S404 It is configured to simply determine the jackpot by comparing the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area by the process of. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), a big hit lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed in accordance with the start of the fluctuation effect in one timer interrupt process, and further, one of them. In the timer interrupt process, even if the determination process of whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the start winning is performed, in the jackpot determination (S410) in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect, S404 The value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the empty hold area of the hold ball storage area by the processing is only compared with the value of each of the 10 random numbers stored in the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c. Therefore, the processing time can be shortened. Therefore, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. In particular, the jackpot lottery, which is an important process in the pachinko machine 10, can be completed within the time allocated to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, when the start winning is detected by the processing of S401, it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the variation start processing. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect, the value of each of the 30 random numbers stored in the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability and the processing of S404 put it in the reserved ball storage area. It is configured to determine the jackpot by comparing it with the stored value of the first random number counter C1. In this case, in one timer interrupt process, a big hit lottery (win / fail judgment) process is performed with the start of the variable effect, and further, in the one timer interrupt process, a continuous advance notice effect associated with the start winning is performed. Even if the determination process of whether or not to allow the start is performed, in the jackpot lottery, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area and the three random numbers stored in the low probability jackpot random number table 202a It is only compared with each value. Therefore, in determining whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect, even if the jackpot determination is strictly performed using the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, the jackpot lottery and the decision to permit the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed. The timer interrupt processing to be performed can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing.

Further, when a start winning prize is detected by the processing of S401, if it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning prize is performed in the fluctuation start processing. Regardless of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect, each of the three random numbers stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table 202a and the start winning prize It is configured to determine the jackpot by comparing it with the acquired value of the random number counter C1 per first. As a result, when the jackpot lottery is performed in one timer interrupt process and the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the jackpot determination in the start permission determination is performed using the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability. Therefore, even if the jackpot lottery is performed while the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice production are performed is the next timer interrupt process. It can be completed by the start.

In this way, based on the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination and the probability changing flag 203b, it is estimated at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start prize detected by the processing of S401 is performed in the fluctuation start processing. Pachinko machine 10 at the time of the game state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state) and the time of determining the start permission of this continuous advance notice effect (that is, the time when the processing of S405 to S420 is performed). Depending on the 10 gaming states (whether it is a low-probability state or a high-probability state), the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot determination by the processing of S410 is a low-probability jackpot random number table 202a, a high-probability jackpot. By setting from the random number table 202b and the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c, the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect are performed is completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. be able to.

Further, since the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c stores a part of the values of 30 random numbers (10 random numbers) that are the jackpots stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 estimated at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is performed in the variable start process is a high probability state, and the continuous advance notice effect is started. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the permission determination (that is, the time when the processing of S405 to S420 is performed) is the high probability state, if the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c is set as the jackpot random number table, The jackpot determination process can be easily simplified.

Further, since the switching of the jackpot random number table is performed only based on the value of the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination and the value of the probability changing flag 203b, the jackpot random number table can be changed easily and surely. be able to.

Since the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c stores a part of the random numbers that become jackpots in the first hit random number counter C1, the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is used. When the jackpot is determined, it is not possible to determine all the jackpots from the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area by the processing of S404, but the result of the jackpot determination here is the start of the continuous advance notice effect. It is only used to determine the permission of the pachinko machine 10 and does not affect the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Further, as will be described later, even if the first hit random number counter C1 which should be a big hit is determined to be "off", it is determined that the start of the continuous notice effect is not permitted (see S418 in FIG. 18), and as a result, , The appearance probability of the continuous notice effect can be reduced. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), it is possible to suppress that the continuous advance notice effect is frequently displayed in accordance with the determination of the jackpot. It is possible to suppress making a person feel annoyed. Further, by providing the simple probability time jackpot random number table 202c in the ROM 202, the appearance probability of the continuous advance notice effect can be adjusted by adjusting the number of jackpot random number values stored in the simple probability time jackpot random number table 202c. Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the characteristics of the model.

When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S410 (S410: Yes), then the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S404 is confirmed and set as the display mode at the time of the jackpot. The three types to be played, that is, the "first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 2 rounds. "2nd probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the jackpot is out of the "time saving jackpot" that is in the time saving state for 100 fluctuations. It is determined whether or not the time display mode is the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S411). Here, as described above, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "6,7,8,9" out of the numerical values 0 to 9, it is determined as the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot). To do.

Then, when it is determined to be the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S411: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability after the variation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected in the process of S401 is performed. Since it is presumed that the state will be reached, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice production is set to ON (S412). Next, the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "73H" (S413), and the process proceeds to S421. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 7 in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111" is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "1", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "1".

In this way, in the case of a jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1", so that the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol. If it is displayed on the device 81, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player. Further, since the game state flag is set to "1" after the continuous advance notice, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the continuous advance notice determination probability that determines the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect. As the table, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 can be selected. In addition, the continuous advance notice post-game status flag allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect in consideration of the game state after the continuous advance notice effect.

Further, as a result of the determination of S411, if the display mode at the time of the jackpot is not the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot) (S411: No), then the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S404 is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the display mode at the time of the jackpot is the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) (S414). Here, as described above, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "4,5" out of the numerical values 0 to 9, it is determined as the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot).

Then, as a result of the determination of S414, if it is the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) (S414: Yes), the pachinko is performed after the variation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected in the processing of S401 is performed. Since it is estimated that the machine 10 will be in a high probability state, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice effect is set to ON (S415), and the process proceeds to S417. Further, as a result of the determination of S404, if it is not the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) (S414: No), the display mode at the time of the jackpot is the time saving jackpot, and the start prize detected in the processing of S401 is used. Since it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 will be in a low probability state after the corresponding variation effect is performed, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is set to off (S416), and the process proceeds to S417.

Next, in the process of S417, the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "70H", and the process shifts to the process of S421. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 7 in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111" is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "0", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "0". Therefore, the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball storage area by the processing of S404 indicate the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) or the time saving jackpot, which is a jackpot other than the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot). If this is the case, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "0", so that the start of the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from being determined.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S410, when it is determined that it is not a big hit, that is, it is out of order (S410: No), then it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice determination probability changing flag 203b is on (S418). ). Then, when the continuous advance notice determination probabilistic change flag 203b is on (S418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S417 process, the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "70H", and the process proceeds to the S421 process. To do. As a result, the hold count command in which the continuous notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "0" is generated, so that the start of the continuous notice effect in the third symbol display device 81 is not determined. Can be done.

That is, when it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probability change) at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is performed in the change start process, S410 If it is determined that the third symbol display device 81 is out of alignment, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change) and the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the result of the variable effect performed after the continuous advance notice effect is not a deviation but a big hit. It can be suggested to the player. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (probability change), if the continuous notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player who is playing with the expectation that it will eventually become a big hit. On the other hand, it can be suggested that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the variable effect performed after the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player can feel a higher interest.

Further, when the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is on, as described above, the jackpot determination in the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect may be performed using the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c. , The first hit random number counter C1 which should be a big hit in the processing of S410 may be determined to be "off", but when the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination is turned on by the processing of S418, Since it is determined that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not permitted based on the determination result of the "off", as a result, the appearance probability of the continuous advance notice effect can be reduced. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (during probabilistic change), it is possible to suppress that the continuous advance notice effect is frequently displayed in accordance with the determination of the jackpot. It is possible to suppress making a person feel annoyed.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S418, when the probability changing flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is off (S418: No), then, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the processing of S404, when the flag is off. As a display mode, it is determined whether or not the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a front-rear out-of-reach reach (S419). As described above, when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "98,99" out of the numerical values 0 to 99, it is determined that the reach is out of front and back. Then, when it is determined that the reach is out of front and back (S419: Yes), the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "72H" (S420), and the process proceeds to S421. As a result, the high-order byte of the hold count command shown in FIG. 7 in which the 7th to 4th bits are composed of fixed values of "0111" is generated. Further, in this hold count command, the continuous advance notice permission flag of the first bit of the upper byte is set to "1", and the game state flag after the continuous advance notice of the 0th bit is set to "0".

In this way, if it is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the process of S401 is performed in the variation start process, the process of S410 is performed. Even if it is determined that the random number counter C1 per first hit indicates a deviation, the continuous advance notice effect is started based on whether or not the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicates a “front-back deviation reach”. Permit judgment is made. Then, even if the result of the jackpot determination is wrong, the value of the continuous notice permission flag is "when the display mode becomes a reach (reach that is out of front and back) that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot. 1 ”is set. As a result, if the continuous advance notice effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a high expectation until the variable display of the front-back deviation reach is completed. Further, since the game state flag is set to "0" after the continuous advance notice, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the continuous advance notice determination probability that determines the third symbol display device 81 to start the continuous advance notice effect. As the table of, the continuous notice determination table 222a1 at the time of disconnection can be selected.

Further, as a result of the processing of S419, when it is determined that the display mode at the time of disconnection is not the front-rear detachment reach (S419: No), the process shifts to the processing of S417 described above, and the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "70H". Set and move to the process of S421. As a result, not only when the values of the various counters stored in the reserved ball storage area by the processing of S404 are hits other than the 15R probability variation jackpot (that is, "2R probability variation jackpot" or "time saving jackpot"), but also "front and back deviation". Even in the case of a deviation other than "reach" (that is, "reach other than front and rear deviation" and "complete deviation"), the value of the continuous notice permission flag is set to "0", so that the continuous notice in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to prevent the start of the production from being decided. Therefore, when the continuous notice effect is displayed, the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a result can be a 15R probability variation jackpot or a front-rear out-of-reach reach. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation given to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is displayed.

Next, in the process of S421, the value of the hold count counter 203a (hold count N) is set as the lower byte of the hold count command, the start winning process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the hold count command shown in FIG. 7 is generated in which the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte are composed of a fixed value of "0111" and the lower byte is composed of the hold count N. The hold count command set by each process of S413, S417, S420, and S421 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is used in the main process of the main control device 110. It is transmitted to the control device 113 (see S701 in FIG. 22).

As a result of the start winning process being executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this way, the main control device 110 draws a lottery for the ball that has won the start winning, and as a result, the jackpot, which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player ( Not only in the case of 15R probability variation jackpot), but also in the case of reach that impresses the player that it is one step before the jackpot (front and back out reach), a continuous notice effect is given to the voice lamp control device 113. The continuous notice permission flag that permits the continuous notice effect is included in the hold count command and transmitted. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of a front-rear out-of-reach reach, and can cause the continuous advance notice effect to be executed under a wide variety of conditions. Therefore, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, the player can have various expectations.

Next, the probability variation setting process executed in the process of S106 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the probability variation setting process (S106). This probability variation setting process sets the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 to a high probability state (probability variation) based on the result of the jackpot lottery of the variation start process (see FIG. 17) executed in the variation process of S104 of the timer interrupt process. It controls the transition between the state) and the low probability state (normal state).

When this probability change setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probability change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on (S451). Here, as described above, the probability variation start flag is set to be turned on when the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start processing is the probability variation jackpot (the first probability variation jackpot or the second probability variation jackpot). Therefore, as a result of the determination in S451, if the probability change start flag is on (FIG. 451: Yes), the probability change in progress flag 203b is set to on (S452). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a high probability state (during probability change).

Then, after the process of S452, the probability change start flag is reset to off (S453), the probability change setting process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. By setting the probability change start flag to off by the processing of S453, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start processing is the probability variation jackpot each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S451, if the probability change start flag is not on, that is, it is off (FIG. 451: No), then whether the probability change end flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on. Whether or not it is determined (S454). Here, as described above, the probability variation end flag is set to be turned on when the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start processing is the time saving jackpot. Therefore, as a result of the determination in S454, the probability variation end flag is turned on. If (FIG. 454: Yes), the probabilistic change flag 203b is set to off (S455). As a result, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be set to a low probability state.

Then, after the process of S455, the probability change end flag is reset to off (S456), the probability change setting process is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. By setting the probability change end flag to off by the processing of S456, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start processing is the time saving jackpot each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

Further, as a result of the determination of S451, the probability change start flag is not on, that is, it is off (S451: No), and as a result of the determination of S454, the probability change end flag is not on, that is, is off. (S454: No), the subsequent processing is skipped, the probability change setting processing is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing. As a result, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start process is neither a probability variation jackpot nor a time saving jackpot, and the result is a deviation, the value of the probability variation in progress flag 203b is retained, so that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is. ..

In this way, when the fluctuation start processing is executed in the fluctuation processing and the jackpot lottery is performed, the value of the probability changing flag 203b is not immediately set according to the result of the jackpot lottery, but the probability variation The setting is performed in the setting process. Then, this probability variation setting process (see S106 in FIG. 15) includes a variation process including a variation start process (see S104 in FIG. 15) and a start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 15) in one timer interrupt process. Since it is a process executed after, the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start process is performed is maintained at least during the start winning process. become. Therefore, in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, the game state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time when the permission determination is made is changed to the game state at the time when the jackpot lottery is performed. (High probability state or low probability state) can be reflected. Therefore, when selecting the jackpot random number table used in the permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect in the start winning process, it is necessary to accurately grasp the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot lottery performed by the fluctuation start process. it can.

In the present embodiment, the probability change start flag and the probability change end flag are reset immediately after the setting of the probability change in progress flag 203b, but this may be performed at the end of the timer interrupt process, or the timer interrupt process may be performed. It may be done at the start. Also with this, it is possible to determine whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery by the fluctuation start processing is the probability variation jackpot or the time saving jackpot each time the timer interrupt processing is executed.

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout launch control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process shifts to S612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if it is not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S612 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S612 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S712 in FIG. 22, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S612, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S613, S614) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S613, S614) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S613, S614) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S613, S614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S614). The hold count counter 203a, the probability change flag 203b, the probability change progress flag 203c for continuous notice determination, the probability change start flag (not shown), and the probability change end flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 are initially set by the process of S614. Is made. After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S611), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S701 to S705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S708 and S709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, output data such as commands updated in the previous periodic processing (S702 to S705) and timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) and stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Is executed for external output processing (S701). Specifically, the presence / absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the payout control device 111 is issued a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls. Send. Further, the hold count command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 18) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S703), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the mouth) 65a is executed (S704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S705). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display unit 83 of. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S706), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S707: Yes), the process is shifted to S701, and each process after S701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S707: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S708, S709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S702 (S709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S701 to S705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S706, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 20 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S712), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S701 to S705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S708 and S709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the initial setting of the start-up process (see FIG. 21) is performed without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value) in the process (S601), it is possible to start from the process of S701. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S915 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S915. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S915 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S915 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S915 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S803: No), and the data shifts to S808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S915, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 of FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S915 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S808 is performed via the processes of S804 to S806. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S809, is skipped, the process is shifted to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S811), the process shifts to the main process.

Note that the clearing process of S809 is skipped because when the processing of S808 is reached via the processing of S804 to S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the main process executed after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S901), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S901: No), S902 to S909. The process proceeds to S910 without performing the process of. In the process of S901, determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is a process related to display (directing) in S902 to S909, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec), whereas S910 This is because it is preferable to execute the effect mode counter 223f update process (see S1201 in FIG. 27) and the command determination process of S911 in a short cycle in the variation display process of the above. By executing the process of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S901 (S901: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of S907 described later. (S902), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S903). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S904 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S904, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S905). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 85 according to the value of the hold count counter 223a is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S906). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to a production that can be held, or may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S906 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S907), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S908). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S908, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S909), and the process proceeds to the process of S910. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S907 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S908 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S910, the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the variation display process of transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 114 is executed. Details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. Then, after the variation display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S911). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 223 (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off process is executed (S915). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to the process of S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the command determination process. This process is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S911 in FIG. 24), and as described above, the content of the command received from the main control device 110 is displayed. It is a judgment process. Further, this process executes the continuous notice determination process (see FIG. 26) when the hold count command is received from the main control device 110, and also determines the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81.

In the command determination process, first, the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b used for determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect is updated (S1001). Specifically, the value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is read from the RAM 223, 1 is added to the value, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (127 in the present embodiment), the value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the continuous notice determination counter 223b is stored in the continuous notice determination counter 223b.

Next, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read and analyzed, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 is determined. Determine. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1002: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1003), and the fluctuation time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S1004). Return to main processing. The fluctuation time extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is used when setting the mode of the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display processing (see FIG. 27) described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1002: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop symbol command has been received from the main control device 110. Then, when it is determined that the stop symbol command has been received (S1005: Yes), the stop symbol (first probability variation jackpot, second probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front / rear deviation reach, reach other than front / rear deviation, etc. (One of the complete deviations) is extracted (S1006), and the process returns to the main process. The stop symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223. Then, in the variable display process (see FIG. 27) described later, a stop symbol to be actually displayed by the third symbol display means is set from the extracted stop symbol and the value of each counter, and the set stop symbol is displayed. The display control device 114 is notified by the stop symbol command.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop symbol command has not been received (S1005: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1107). In the discrimination process in S1107, if the 7th to 4th bits of the upper byte of the command received from the main control device 110 are "0111" (binary number), the hold count command is received from the main control device 110. Judge. Then, when it is determined that the hold count command has been received (S1007: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main controller 110 stored in the lower byte of the hold count command (that is, the hold count command is held by the main controller 110). The number of hold times of the variation effect) is extracted and stored in the hold number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1008).

Here, since the hold count command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the process of S1008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the hold count counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold count counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the hold count of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning. The value of the counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the hold count counter 203a of the main controller 110.

After the process of S1008, the continuous notice determination process is executed (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. By this continuous advance notice determination process, when the main control device 110 notifies the permission of the continuous advance notice effect by the hold count command, it is determined whether or not to actually start the continuous advance notice effect. Details of this continuous notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1007 (S1007: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Then (S1010), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. It is transmitted to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the continuous advance notice determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the continuous advance notice determination process. This process is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1009 in FIG. 25), and as described above, from the main control device 110 by the hold count command. When the permission of the continuous advance notice effect is notified, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is actually started.

In the continuous notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1101), and it is determined that it is not 1 (that is, 0). If this is the case (S1101: No), since the main control device 110 has determined that the continuous advance notice effect is not performed, the subsequent processing is omitted and the process returns to the command determination processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1101: Yes), the main control device 110 determines that the continuous notice effect is permitted. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect in the subsequent processing after S1102.

First, the processes of S110 to S1110 are the processes for determining whether or not any one of the following (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and are the processes (condition 1) to (condition 3). If none of the above is satisfied, the process returns to the command determination process without deciding to start the continuous advance notice effect. Here, (condition 1) is that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set in the variation effect held by the main control device 110, and (condition 2) is the variation effect held by the main control device 110. The execution of the continuous notice effect is set in at least a part of the above, and the game state after the continuous notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the continuous notice effect is set becomes a "big hit", and the number of hold times. There are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set (that is, holding). The difference between the value of the number-of-times counter 223a and the value of the continuous advance number-of-times counter 223c is 3 or more), and (Condition 3) is a continuous advance notice effect in at least a part of the variation effect held in the main control device 110. Is set, and in all the variable effects for which the continuous advance notice effect is set, the game state after the continuous advance notice effect is performed becomes "off", and further, the permission is newly notified by the hold count command. The game state after the continuous notice production is "big hit".

In the process of S1102, the value of the hold count counter 223a is assigned to the variable A, and then the value of the continuous advance notice counter 223c is assigned to the variable B (S1103). Further, a state flag is provided in the RAM 223, and "0" is set as an initial value (S1104). This state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the above-mentioned (condition 3) is satisfied, and is set to "1" when it is determined that the (condition 3) is satisfied. Then, as will be described in detail later, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, if this state flag is set to "1", that is, the continuous advance notice effect is satisfied in a state of satisfying (condition 3). When the start is determined, a process of setting the effect mode of the continuous notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous notice effect is newly set as a special mode is performed (see S1118 to S1121).

After the processing of S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous advance notice number counter 223c) is 0 (S1105), and when it is determined that the value of the variable B is 0 (S1105: Yes). ), The execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set in the variable effect held in the main control device 110, and it can be determined that the above (condition 1) is satisfied. Therefore, the process proceeds to S1111 and the process after S1111 is performed. , It is decided whether or not to start the continuous notice production.

On the other hand, when the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous advance notice number counter 223c) is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the value is 1 or more (S1105: No), at least a part of the variation effect held in the main control device 110. Since it can be determined that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set in, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is 1 (S1106). When the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is 1 (S1106: Yes), the gaming state after the continuous advance notice effect is performed in all the variable effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Is in the "big hit" state, and further, the difference between the value of the variable A (that is, the hold count counter 223a) and the value of the variable B (that is, the continuous notice count counter 223c) is calculated, and the difference is set to the variable C. Substituting (S1107), it is determined whether or not the variable C is 3 or more (S1108). As a result, when it is determined that the variable C is 3 or more (S1108: Yes), the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received hold count command and the last time the continuous notice effect is set to be executed. It can be determined that there are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the variable effect (holding ball) and. Therefore, from the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1108, it can be determined that the above-mentioned (condition 2) is satisfied. Whether or not to do it is decided.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable C is not 3 or more (that is, less than 3) as a result of the processing of S1108, the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the received hold count command and the continuous notice at the present time. Since there are no two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the final variable effect (holding ball) for which the execution of the effect is set, the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1108. Therefore, it can be determined that none of the above-mentioned (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, in this case, the subsequent processing is omitted, and the process returns to the command determination processing without determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

Here, when the value of the state flag 223d after continuous advance notice is 1 (S1106: Yes), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily changed by the variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect set at the present time is performed. Since the player will be in the "big hit" state, the expectation of the continuous advance notice effect will be interrupted once by this "big hit", but if (condition 2) is satisfied, the variable effect corresponding to the received hold count command ( There are two or more variable effects (holding balls) between the holding ball) and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Therefore, only in such a case, if the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, the chance eye can be displayed as a stop symbol in the two or more variable effects performed after the "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the continuous advance notice effect and to strengthen the expectation that the player feels for the continuous advance notice effect.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1106, when the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1106: No), in all the variable effects for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. Since the game state after the variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect is performed becomes the "off" state, the 0th bit of the upper byte of the hold count command received from the main control device 110 (that is, the game after the continuous advance notice effect). It is determined whether or not the value of the state flag) is 1 (S1109). Then, when the value of the 0th bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1 (S1109: Yes), after the continuous notice effect in which permission is newly notified by the hold count command. It can be judged that the game state of is a "big hit". Therefore, from the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1109, it can be determined that the above-mentioned (condition 3) is satisfied. Therefore, the state flag provided in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1104 is set to "1". , (Condition 3) is satisfied (S1110), and then the process proceeds to S1111. Then, it is determined whether or not to start the continuous advance notice effect by the processing after S1111.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1109, when it is determined that the value of the 0th bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous advance notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1109: No). ), Since the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which permission is newly notified by the hold count command is "off", the above-mentioned (Condition 1) is described from the results of the processing of S1105, the processing of S1106, and the processing of S1109. )-(Condition 3) can be judged to be unsatisfactory. Therefore, in this case, the subsequent processing is omitted, and the process returns to the command determination processing without determining the start of the continuous advance notice effect.

Here, when the value of the state flag 223d after the continuous advance notice is 0 (S1106: No), the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily changed by the variable effect after the continuous advance notice effect set at the present time is performed. It becomes "off" state. In such a situation, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability only when the game state after the continuous advance notice effect for which the permission is newly notified by the hold count command becomes "big hit". If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "off" state after the continuous notice effect set at the present time is performed, the continuous notice effect is further performed and the pachinko machine 10 is in the "off" state again. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the "off" state after the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed and then the player becomes "off state" and the continuous advance notice effect is subsequently performed, the player can be strongly expected to become a "big hit". Can motivate the game machine to continue.

As described above, in the processing of S1102 to S1110, it is determined whether or not any one of the above-mentioned (condition 1) to (condition 3) is satisfied, and all of (condition 1) to (condition 3) are satisfied. If it is not satisfied, the continuous advance notice determination process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process. As a result, if none of (Condition 1) to (Condition 3) is satisfied, the processing after S1111 that determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not executed, so that the decision to start the continuous advance notice effect is made reliably and easily. You can prevent it from being broken. Further, since the processing after S1111 is omitted, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S1111 to S1113, the continuous advance notice determination used to determine the start of the continuous advance notice effect from the two continuous advance notice determination tables 222a (the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 or the missed continuous advance notice determination table 222a2). Select the table (see Figure 8).

First, in the processing of S1111, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit (that is, the game state flag after continuous advance notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is 1, and if it is 1, (S1111: Yes), the continuous advance notice effect ends. Since the later game state is a big hit, the jackpot continuous notice determination table 222a1 is selected as the continuous notice determination table used for determining the start of the continuous notice effect (S1112). On the other hand, when it is determined that the 0th bit (game state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1111: No), the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect is Since it is out of alignment, the continuous advance notice determination table 222a2 at the time of disconnection is selected as the continuous advance notice determination table (see FIG. 8) to be used (S1113).

When the continuous advance notice determination table is selected by the processing of S1111 to S1113, the value of the hold count counter 223a (the value of the hold count counter 223a from the selected continuous advance notice determination table (the jackpot continuous advance notice determination table 222a1 or the loss continuous advance notice determination table 222a2). That is, the continuous notice determination range associated with the number of times the fluctuation effect is held in the main control device 110) is specified, and the continuous notice determination range is compared with the continuous notice determination counter 223b (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is started by determining whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is included in the continuous advance notice determination range (S1115).

As a result, when it is determined that the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is not included in the continuous advance notice determination range and the continuous advance notice effect is not started (S1115: No), the processes after S1116 are skipped and the process returns to the main process. That is, the setting of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is retained as it is. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball that is set to give a variable effect notice by the continuous notice number counter 223c, a continuous notice effect is performed on the reserved ball, and if such a reserved ball does not exist, There will be no continuous notice production.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous advance notice determination counter 223b is included in the continuous advance notice determination range and it is determined that the continuous advance notice effect is to be started (S1115: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 223a is set in the continuous advance notice number counter 223c (S1115: Yes). S1116), and the value of the 0th bit (game state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set in the state flag 223d after continuous notice (S1117). Here, by setting the value of the hold count counter 223a in the continuous advance notice count counter 223c by the process of S1116, in all the hold balls held before the hold ball corresponding to the hold count command received this time, Along with the variable effect on the reserved ball, the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 can display the chance eye over all the variation effects corresponding to the reserved spheres held before the reserved spheres corresponding to the held number of times command received this time.

Further, since the value of the game state flag after continuous notice included in the hold count command is set in the state flag 223d after continuous notice by the process of S1117, the fluctuation after the continuous notice effect set by the process of S1116 is completed. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 obtained by the production can be maintained. Then, when the continuous advance notice determination process is executed again, the process of S1106 satisfies the above-mentioned (condition 2) or (condition 3) by using the value of the continuous advance notice post-state flag 223d set here. It is possible to judge whether or not.

After the processing of S1117, it is determined by the processing of S1104 whether or not the state flag provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (S1118), and if the state flag is 1, (S1118: Yes), (Condition 3). It can be judged that the start of the continuous advance notice production has been decided in a satisfactory state. Therefore, in the subsequent processing of S1119 to S1121, a special mode is set as an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is newly set this time.

That is, the continuous notice effect mode in which the B bit of the continuous notice mode flag 223e indicated by the variable B is set to 1 (S1119) and execution is set for the variable effect corresponding to the (B + 1) hold ball. As a special aspect. Next, 1 is added to the variable B (S1120), and it is determined whether or not the value of the added variable B is equal to the value of the variable A (S1121). Then, when the value of the variable B added by 1 is not equal to the value of the variable A (S1121: No), the process returns to the process of S1119, and the processes of S1119 to S1121 are executed again. On the other hand, when the value of the variable B added by 1 is equal to the value of the variable A (S1121: Yes), the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the value of the variable B when shifting from the processing of S1118 to the processing of S1119 is the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c (before a new value is set by the processing of S1116) assigned by the processing of S1103. That is, it represents the number of variable effects for which continuous advance notice effects have been set in the past. The value of the variable A is the value of the hold count counter 223a assigned by the process of S1102, and represents the number of fluctuation effects (hold balls) currently held in the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S1119 to S1121 is repeated until the value of the variable B and the value of the variable A become equal, so that the variation effect is reserved after the variation effect for which the continuous advance notice effect is set in the past (that is,). , The effect mode of the continuous notice effect in (variable effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is newly set this time) is set to a special mode.

In this way, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by satisfying the above-mentioned (condition 3), the effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect (holding ball) in which the continuous advance notice effect is newly set is set. By setting as a special mode, even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes "off" as a result of performing the continuous notice effect set in the past, a newly set continuous notice is subsequently set. Since the production is performed in a special mode, the player can be strongly expected to be a "big hit" by the special mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the variation display process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the variable display process. This process is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S910 in FIG. 24), and as described above, the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. In this case, it is a process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and transmitting a command instructing the set mode to the display control device 114.

In the variation display process, first, the effect mode counter 223f is updated (S1201). Specifically, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (3 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the effect mode counter 223f is stored in the RAM 223.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1202: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. Exit and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1202: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1203), and the command is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S1004 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 25). The variation time in the variation effect is acquired from RAM 223 (S1204).

Next, in the process of S1006 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25), the stopped symbol of the variation effect extracted from the stop symbol command is acquired from the RAM 223, and after the variation effect, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to the "big hit" state. It is determined whether or not to set (S1205). Then, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not set to the "big hit" state after the variation effect (S1205: No), it is further determined whether or not the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2 or more (S1206).

As a result, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2 or more (S1206: Yes), the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect, so the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 28) is executed. Then (S1208), the process proceeds to S1209. As a result, as the effect mode and stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the effect mode and stop symbol (chance) shown in FIG. 10 are replaced with the variation pattern instructed by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. Eyes) are set. Therefore, it is possible to perform the variable effect in an effect mode suitable for the continuous advance notice effect, and as the continuous advance notice effect, it is possible to display a chance eye when the variable effect is stopped. The details of the continuous notice setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1205, when it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "big hit" state after the fluctuation effect (S1205: Yes), and as a result of the processing of S1206, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c. Is not 2 or more (that is, less than 2), and it is determined that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is not set for the variable effect, or that it is the last variable effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. In the case of (S1206: No), the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop symbol command are used. The stop symbol in the instructed third symbol display device 81 is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209.

Here, if it is determined by the process of S1205 that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "big hit" state after the variation effect, regardless of whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variation effect. , S1207 sets the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, and the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command. This is because, in the present embodiment, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set so that the setting can be easily performed without taking into account the gaming state after the variable effect. If the game state after the variable effect for which the execution of is set is "big hit", the chance eye, which is also a missed symbol, cannot be displayed as the stop symbol of the variable effect, and the chance eye is displayed after the big hit symbol. If it is displayed, there is a risk that the player's uplifting feeling may be suppressed.

Therefore, when it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the "big hit" state after the fluctuation effect, the main control device 110 determines whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variation effect. By setting the effect mode of the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) instructed by the variation pattern command and the stop symbol instructed by the stop symbol command, the variation effect gives the player a "big hit". It is possible to have a high sense of expectation for.

Further, when the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 1 due to the processing of S1206, since it is the last variable effect in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set, the chance eye is not displayed as a stop symbol and the continuous advance notice is given. Similar to the case where the value of the number-of-times counter 223c is 0, a predetermined stop symbol is set in accordance with the mode of the variation effect notified from the main control device 110.

Next, the update process of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is executed (S1209). Specifically, the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is subtracted by 1, and when the counter value becomes 0, the value is retained. Then, the update value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is stored in the RAM 223.

Next, in the process of S1210, the display variation pattern command for instructing the effect mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 set by S1207 or S1208, and the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted. A display stop symbol command to be instructed is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1210). The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 according to these commands.

Then, the value of the hold count counter 223a is reduced by 1 (S1211) in accordance with the consumption of the hold ball (completion of the setting of the variation display corresponding to the hold ball), and the content of the continuous notice mode flag 223e is changed by only one bit to the right. At the same time as shifting, 0 is inserted into the vacant bit (7th bit) (S1212) to end this variation display process and return to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the continuous advance notice setting process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the continuous notice setting process. This process is executed in the variable display process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1208 in FIG. 27), and as described above, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for the variable effect. When is set, as the effect mode and stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the figure is replaced with the variation pattern and the stop symbol instructed by the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command from the main control device 110. This is a process for setting the effect mode and the stop symbol (chance eye) shown in 10.

In this continuous advance notice setting process, first, by the processes of S1301 to S1316, the variation time acquired by the process of S1204 of the variation display process and the value of the effect mode counter 223f are varied with respect to the display control device 114. Set a display variation pattern command that indicates the effect mode of the effect.

In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not the variation time acquired by the process of S1204 of the variation display process is 11 seconds (S1301). Then, when the fluctuation time is 11 seconds (S1301: Yes), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is out of the fluctuation mode, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, regardless of the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Instead, AA01H is set as a display variation pattern command (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1317. As a result, in the display control device 114, the "disengagement variation" mode is set as the effect mode of the variation display.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time is not 11 seconds (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0 (S1303), and the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0 (S1301: No). S1303: Yes), and further, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time acquired by the processing of S1204 of the fluctuation display processing is 25 seconds (S1304). When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 25 seconds (S1304: Yes), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach fluctuation, and as a result of the processing of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Is 0, so AA81H is set as a display variation pattern command (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1317. As a result, in the display control device 114, the mode of "2 seconds shortened normal reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" is set as the effect mode of the variation display.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1304, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 25 seconds (S1304: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1306). When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1306: Yes), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the super reach fluctuation, and as a result of the processing of S1303, the effect mode counter 223f Since the value is 0, AA82H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1307), and the process proceeds to S1317. As a result, in the display control device 114, the mode of "2 seconds shortened super reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" is set as the effect mode of the variation display.

Further, when it is determined as a result of the processing of S1306 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1306: No), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the special reach fluctuation (variation time: 50 seconds). Further, as a result of the processing of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is 0, so AA83H is set as the display variation pattern command (S1308), and the process proceeds to S1317. As a result, in the display control device 114, the mode of "2 seconds shortened special reach fluctuation + 2 seconds re-variation" is set as the effect mode of the variation display.

On the other hand, even when the value of the effect mode counter 223f is not 0 (that is, any one of 1 to 3) as a result of the processing of S1303, the fluctuation time acquired by the processing of S1204 of the fluctuation display processing is further performed. Is 25 seconds or not (S1309). When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 25 seconds (S1309: Yes), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach fluctuation, and as a result of the processing of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Is any of 1 to 3, so AA40H is first set as a display variation pattern command (S1310), and the process proceeds to S1314.

Then, in the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command. As a result, when the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the normal reach fluctuation, any one of "AA41H", "AA42H", and "AA43H" is used as the display fluctuation pattern command according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Is generated, so that the normal reach variation mode instructed by the main control device 110 is divided into two pseudo variation effects as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11.

When the display variation pattern command is "AA41H", the display control device 114 sets the "off variation" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo variation. As the effect mode of the effect, the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode is set. Further, when the display variation pattern command is "AA42H", the display control device 114 sets the "disengagement variation + slip effect" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo effect. As an effect mode of a typical variation effect, an "outside variation" mode is set. Further, when the display fluctuation pattern command is "AA43H", the display control device 114 sets the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 second extension" mode as the production mode of the first pseudo fluctuation effect, and the second time. As an effect mode of the pseudo-variation effect of, the "disengagement variation + 1.5 second extension" mode is set.

After the processing of S1314, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1315). Then, when the fluctuation time is 25 seconds, it is determined in the process of S1315 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1315: No), so the process proceeds to the process of S1317.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1309, if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 25 seconds (S1309: No), then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1311). When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1311: Yes), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the super reach fluctuation, and as a result of the processing of S1303, the effect mode counter 223f Since the value is one of 1 to 3, AA50H is first set as the display variation pattern command (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1314.

Then, in the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command as in the case of the normal reach variation. As a result, the commands "AA51H" to "AA53H" are generated. Next, it is determined again whether or not the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1315), and if the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1315: Yes), the lower byte of the display fluctuation pattern command is rewritten (S1316). ), The process proceeds to S1317. That is, when the lower byte of the display variation pattern command is "AA53H" or more, it is rewritten to "AA52H". In other cases, the display variation pattern command obtained in the process of S1314 is retained as it is.

As a result, when the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is a super reach fluctuation, either "AA51H" or "AA52H" is generated as a display fluctuation pattern command according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Therefore, the reach variation mode instructed by the main control device 110 is divided into two pseudo variation effects as shown in FIGS. 10 and 12.

Then, when the display fluctuation pattern command is "AA51H", the display control device 114 sets the "disengagement fluctuation + 1 second extension" mode as the production mode of the first pseudo fluctuation effect, and the second pseudo. As an effect mode of a typical variation effect, a "disappearance variation with advance notice effect" mode is set. When the display variation pattern command is "AA52H", the display control device 114 sets the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo variation effect. As an effect mode of a typical variation effect, a mode of "disengagement variation + 1 second extension" is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined as a result of the processing of S1311 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1311: No), the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main controller 110 is the special reach fluctuation (variation time: 50 seconds). Further, as a result of the processing of S1303, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is any one of 1 to 3, so AA60H is first set as the display variation pattern command (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1314.

Then, in the process of S1314, the value of the effect mode counter 223f is added to the display variation pattern command. As a result, when the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is a special reach fluctuation, any of "AA61H", "AA62H", and "AA63H" is used as the display fluctuation pattern command according to the value of the effect mode counter 223f. Since the sword is generated, the special reach variation mode instructed by the main control device 110 is divided into three pseudo variation effects as shown in FIGS. 10 and 13.

When the display variation pattern command is "AA61H", the display control device 114 sets the "off variation" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo variation. As the effect mode of the effect, the "displacement variation" mode is set, and as the effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect, the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode is set. When the display variation pattern command is "AA62H", the display control device 114 sets the "off variation" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo variation. As an effect mode of the effect, a "displacement variation with advance notice effect" mode is set, and as an effect mode of the third pseudo variation effect, a "disengagement variation" mode is set. Further, when the display variation pattern command is "AA63H", the display control device 114 sets the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode as the effect mode of the first pseudo variation effect, and sets the second pseudo variation effect. As an effect mode of a typical variation effect, a "disengagement variation" mode is set, and as an effect mode of a third pseudo variation effect, a "disengagement variation" mode is set.

After the processing of S1314, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time is 40 seconds (S1315). Then, when the fluctuation time is 50 seconds, it is determined in the process of S1315 that the fluctuation time is not 40 seconds (S1315: No), so the process proceeds to the process of S1317.

In the process of S1317, chance eyes (the symbols on the middle line L2 are "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol column Z1) are set as the stop symbols. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the chance eye as a stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 when the variation effect is stopped, including the pseudo variation effect. The player can recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is being performed by continuously displaying the chance eyes on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol after the variable display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the 0th bit (that is, the bit corresponding to the first reserved ball) of the continuous advance notice mode flag is 1 (S1318), and if it is 1, (S1318: Yes), S1301. 0100H is added to the display variation pattern command set by the processes of ~ S1316 (S1319), the continuous advance notice setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the variation display process. As a result, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is changed from "AAH" to "ABH". Therefore, in the display control device 114, the 0th bit of the upper byte of the received display variation pattern command is changed to "1". If it is set, the background color can be set to be a special color when the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the variation effect (see S1727 in FIG. 32).

On the other hand, when the value of the 0th bit (that is, the bit corresponding to the first holding ball) of the continuous advance notice mode flag is not 1 (that is, 0) (S1318: No), the processing of S1319 is omitted. The continuous notice setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the variable display process. As a result, the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is maintained as "AAH". Therefore, in the display control device 114, if the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is set to "0". , When the chance eye is displayed as the stop symbol of the variation effect, the background color is set to be the normal color (see S1728 in FIG. 32).

As described above, in the continuous advance notice setting process, a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects are produced, which are distributed from the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 based on the time allocated to the fluctuation pattern by the main control device 110. Each aspect is set. As a result, it is possible to appropriately set a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects within the fluctuation time assigned to the fluctuation pattern instructed by the main control device 110.

Further, in the variation display effect processing including the continuous advance notice setting process, the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol command, and the continuous advance notice permission flag indicated by the hold count command are set. Correspondingly, the details of the variation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol, and the execution of the continuous notice effect are set.

Here, in a general pachinko machine, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control device, but in order to prevent delays and malfunctions in the lottery process, it is required to keep the processing load related to the main control device small. On the other hand, in the main control device 110, only rough settings related to the fluctuation effect and the continuous advance notice effect and a command transmission for notifying the setting to the voice lamp control device 113 are performed, so that the main control device 110 is used. The processing load can be kept small. Further, in the main control device 110, since the pattern of each effect to be determined can be reduced, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced, and the cost of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the voice lamp control device 113 is equipped with the MPU 221 having a high processing capacity, various production modes can be set in response to various commands from the main control device 110. Further, even when a high load is required for the processing related to the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily performed. As a result, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is suppressed, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various effects, and it is possible to devise an effect that does not make the player bored.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 29 to 34, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on and an external interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received.

First, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the external interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When external interrupt processing is executed, the received command is determined and processing is performed according to the command.

In this external interrupt processing, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a production permission command (S1401), and if it is a production permission command (S1401: Yes), the production permission flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1401). S1402), the external interrupt processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a production permission command (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the received command is a display variation pattern command (S1403), and if it is a display variation pattern command (S1403). S1403: Yes), the fluctuation start flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1404), and the external interrupt processing is terminated. At this time, the received display variation pattern command is stored in the work RAM 233, and the pseudo variation distribution process (see FIGS. 32 and 33) described later is used to display the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command. Set.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1403, if the received command is not a display variation pattern command (S1403: No), then it is determined whether the received command is a stop command (S1405), and if it is a stop command (S1405). S1405: Yes), the stop flag of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1406), and the external interrupt processing is terminated.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1405, if the received command is not a stop command (S1405: No), the processing corresponding to the other received command is executed (S1407), and the external interrupt processing is terminated. For example, if the received command is a display stop symbol command, a process of setting a stop symbol to be displayed after the variation effect is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1501). Specifically, the process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. After that, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1502), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1503). Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed by the process of S1503. The extracted character information is written in the inner area (S1504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag is turned on in order to determine whether or not the effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1505), and if the effect permission flag is not turned on (S1505). : No), the process after S1506 is waited until the effect permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, that is, until the effect permission flag is turned on.

As a result of the determination in S1505, if the effect permission flag is turned on (S1505: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1504 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the process proceeds to S1506 or later.

In the process of S1506, it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit (S1506: No), the third symbol display device 81 is subjected to a variation effect. The variable effect process for displaying the continuous notice effect is executed (S1507), and the process proceeds to the process of S1509. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1506, if the jackpot is in progress (S1506: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1508). In the jackpot production process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, and the background image, etc., which is different for each round, is updated (new extraction of character information from video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write to). After the jackpot effect processing (S1508) is completed, the processing shifts to the processing of S1509.

In the process of S1509, in order to execute the process (S1506 to S1508) for producing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 msec, it is confirmed whether or not 20 msec or more has passed since the process of S1506 was started. (S1509), if not, wait until 20 msec or more elapses (S1509: No), and if 20 msec or more elapses (S1509: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S1506. Then, the processes of S1506 to S1509 are repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the variation effect processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This variation effect processing is executed in the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1507 in FIG. 30), and as described above, the variation effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. , It is a process to display a chance eye with a stop symbol of a variable effect as a continuous notice effect.

In the variation effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the changing flag indicating that the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 provided in the work RAM 233 is changing is on (S1601). If the changing flag is not on, that is, off (S1601: No), the display being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is not changing, so that the third symbol provided in the work RAM 233 is next. It is determined whether or not the variation start flag for permitting the start of the variation effect is turned on in the display device 81 (S1602). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag is on (S1602: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1603), the changing flag is turned on (S1604), and the pseudo fluctuation distribution process is executed (S1605).

This pseudo-variable distribution process is a process of allocating one variation effect (holding ball) to a plurality of pseudo-variation effects according to the content of the display variation pattern command, and is an individual process based on the display variation pattern command. The production mode of the pseudo-variable effect of is determined. Further, the distribution number counter 233a is set with a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of distributions of the pseudo fluctuation effect. Further, when the display variation pattern command does not distribute to the pseudo variation effect, the effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on the display variation pattern command. In this case, 0 is set as the value of the distribution number counter 233a. The details of this pseudo-variable distribution processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

Next, the variation effect setting process is executed (S1606), and the pseudo variation to be displayed to the third symbol display device 81 from the pseudo variation effects distributed in the pseudo variation distribution process. Set the production mode of the production. If it is not distributed to the pseudo variable effect, the effect mode of the variable effect determined in the pseudo variable distribution process is set. In addition, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is updated according to the setting of the effect mode of the variation effect. That is, when the distribution number counter 233a is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1, and when it is 0, the value is retained. The details of this variation effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Then, the variation effect data of the effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect set by the processing of S1606 is read from the video RAM according to the elapsed fluctuation time, and the image based on the read data is the third symbol. It is displayed on the LCD of the display device 81 (S1607), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can execute the variation effect in the effect mode according to the display variation pattern command.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1601, if the changing flag is on (S1601: Yes), the display being executed by the third symbol display device 81 is changing, so that the fluctuation display provided in the RAM 233 is next. It is determined whether or not the stop flag instructing the stop of is turned on (S1608). Then, if the stop flag is on (S1608: Yes), the stop flag and the changing flag are turned off (S1611), and the stop symbol set by the display stop symbol command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The displayed symbol is stopped (S1612), and the process returns to the main process. Here, in the process of S1612, if the background color of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is set to a special color in the pseudo-variation distribution process (S1605) (see S1727 of FIG. 32), the background color of the stop symbol Is displayed in red on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if the background color of the stop symbol of the variation effect is set to the normal color (see S1728 of FIG. 32), the background color of the stop symbol is displayed in blue on the third symbol display device 81. Here, when the chance eye is displayed on the stop symbol and the continuous advance notice effect is performed, when the voice lamp control device 113 notifies that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in a special mode, the pseudo variable distribution process ( Since the background color of the stop symbol is set to a special color by S1605), the chance eyes are continuously displayed as the stop symbol, and the background color when the chance eyes are displayed is red, which is different from the normal blue. As a result, the player can have a higher expectation.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1608, when the stop flag is not on, that is, is off (S1608: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 0, and the distribution number counter 233a is determined. When the value of is not 0 (S1609: No), there is a pseudo variation effect in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, so that it is further set by the variation effect setting process of S1606. , It is determined whether or not the pseudo variation effect currently being performed is completed (S1610), and if it is determined that the pseudo variation effect is completed (S1610: Yes), the process proceeds to S1606 and the variation effect setting process is performed. Next, the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, and the process proceeds to S1607. As a result, the plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects distributed by the pseudo fluctuation distribution process can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when it is determined by the processing of S1609 that the value of the distribution number counter is 0 (S1609: Yes), is all the distributed pseudo variation effects set by the variation effect setting process? Since one variation effect (holding ball) is not distributed to a plurality of pseudo variation effects, the process shifts to S1607, and the currently set effect mode is based on the variation effect data according to the elapsed variation time. The image is displayed on the LCD. Further, even when it is determined by the processing of S1610 that the pseudo fluctuation effect currently being performed set by the variation effect setting process of S1606 has not been completed (S1610: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1607. Then, in the currently set effect mode, an image based on the variation effect data according to the variation elapsed time is displayed on the LCD.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1601 and S1602, when the changing flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1601: No) and the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1602: No). Other display processing, for example, a customer waiting effect displayed when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player elapses for a predetermined time, and the variation effect processing are terminated.

Next, the pseudo-variable distribution processing executed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the pseudo-variable distribution processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This pseudo-variation distribution process is executed in the variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1605 in FIG. 31), and as described above, the content of the display variation pattern command. This is a process of allocating one variation effect (holding ball) to a plurality of pseudo variation effects according to the above.

In this pseudo-variable distribution processing, as shown in FIG. 32, first, in the processing of S1404 of the external interrupt processing, the values of the 7th to 4th bits of the lower byte of the display variation pattern command stored in the work RAM 233 are selected. It is assigned to the variable P (S1701), and the values of the third to 0th bits of the lower byte of the display variation pattern command are assigned to the variable Q (S1702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 8 (S1703), and if the value of the variable P is 8 (S1703: Yes), the display variation pattern commands are "AA81H" to "AA83H", "AA83H". Since it corresponds to any of "AB81H" to "AB83H" (see FIG. 10), the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 0 (S1704), and the value obtained by adding 20H to the variable Q is the first effect register 233b. Is set to (S1705), and the process proceeds to S1726.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command is "AA81H" or "AB81H" (that is, when the variable Q is 1), 21H is set in the first effect register 233b, so that the third symbol display device In 81, the variation effect is executed in the "2 second shortened normal reach variation + 2 second re-variation" mode (see FIG. 14A). Further, when the display variation pattern command is "AA82H" or "AB82H" (that is, when the variable Q is 2), 22H is set in the first effect register 233b, so that the third symbol display device 81 In, the variation effect is executed in the "2-second shortened super reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode (see FIG. 14B). Further, when the display variation pattern command is "AA83H" or "AB83H" (that is, when the variable Q is 3), 23H is set in the first effect register 233b, so that the third symbol display device 81 In, the variation effect is executed in the "2-second shortened special reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode (see FIG. 14C).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 8 as a result of the processing of S1703 (S1703: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 6 (S1706), and the value of the variable P is determined. If is 6 (S1706: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to any one of "AA61H" to "AA63H" and "AB61H" to "AB63H" (see FIG. 10), so that the distribution number counter 233a The value is set to 2 (S1707). As a result, it is divided into three pseudo fluctuation effects.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1708), and if the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1708: Yes), the display variation pattern command is "AA61H" or "AB61H". Therefore, 14H is set in the first effect register 233b, 10H is set in the second effect register 233c, 10H is set in the third effect register 233d (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1726.

Here, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 2 by the variable effect setting process (see S1606 in FIG. 31), the order is the third effect register 233d, the second effect register 233c, and the first effect register 233b. Since the variation effect of the pseudo variation effect is set, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the "off variation" mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the "off variation" mode. Then, the third pseudo fluctuation effect is executed in the "displacement variation with notice effect" mode (see FIG. 13B).

As a result of the processing of S1708, when the value of the variable Q is not 1 (S1708: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1710), and if the value of the variable Q is 2. (S1710: Yes) Since the variable pattern command for display is "AA62H" or "AB62H", 10H is set in the first effect register 233b, 14H is set in the second effect register 233c, and the third effect register 233d is set. 10H is set to (S1711), and the process proceeds to S1726. As a result, the first pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation" mode, the second pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode, and the third pseudo-variation effect is executed. Is executed in the "disengagement" mode (see FIG. 13 (c)).

As a result of the processing of S1710, when the value of the variable Q is not 2 (S1710: No), the display variation pattern command is "AA63H" or "AB63H", so 10H is set in the first effect register 233b, and the first effect register is set to 10H. 2 The effect register 233c is set to 10H, the third effect register 233d is set to 14H (S1712), and the process proceeds to S1726. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the "disengagement variation with advance notice effect" mode, the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the "disengagement variation" mode, and the third pseudo variation effect is executed. Is executed in the "disengagement" mode (see FIG. 13 (d)).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 6 as a result of the processing of S1706 (S1706: No), then the process proceeds to the processing of S1713 shown in FIG. 33, and whether or not the value of the variable P is 5. To determine. Then, if the value of the variable P is 5 (S1713: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to any one of "AA51H", "AA52H", "AB51H", and "AB52H" (see FIG. 10). , The value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 1 (S1714). As a result, it is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1715), and if the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1715: Yes), the display variation pattern command is "AA51H" or "AB51H". Therefore, 14H is set in the first effect register 233b, 11H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1716), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. 32.

Here, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 2 by the variation effect setting process (see S1606 in FIG. 31), the pseudo variation is in the order of the second effect register 233c and the first effect register 233b. Since the variation effect of the effect is set, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the "displacement variation + 1 second extension" mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode. (See FIG. 12 (b)).

When the value of the variable Q is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1715 (S1715: No), the display variation pattern command is "AA52H" or "AB52H", so 11H is set in the first effect register 233b, and the first effect register 233b is set to 11H. 2 14H is set in the effect register 233c (S1717), and the process proceeds to the process of S1726 of FIG. As a result, the first pseudo variation effect is executed in the "disengagement variation with notice effect" mode, and the second pseudo variation effect is executed in the "disengagement variation + 1 second extension" mode (FIG. 12 (c). )reference).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable P is not 5 as a result of the processing of S1713 (S1713: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable P is 4 (S1718), and the value of the variable P is determined. If is 4 (S1718: Yes), the display variation pattern command corresponds to any one of "AA41H" to "AA43H" and "AB41H" to "AB43H" (see FIG. 10), so that the distribution number counter 233a The value is set to 1 (S1719). As a result, it is divided into two pseudo fluctuation effects.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1720), and if the value of the variable Q is 1 (S1720: Yes), the display variation pattern command is "AA41H" or "AB41H". Therefore, 13H is set in the first effect register 233b, 10H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1721), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. As a result, the first pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation" mode, and the second pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation + slip effect" mode (see FIG. 11B). ..

As a result of the processing of S1720, when the value of the variable Q is not 1 (S1720: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variable Q is 2 (S1722), and if the value of the variable Q is 2. (S1722: Yes) Since the variable pattern command for display is "AA42H" or "AB42H", 10H is set in the first effect register 233b and 13H is set in the second effect register 233c (S1723). The process proceeds to S1726 of 32. As a result, the first pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation + slip-effect" mode, and the second pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation" mode (see FIG. 11 (c)). ..

As a result of the processing of S1722, when the value of the variable Q is not 2 (S1722: No), the display variation pattern command is "AA43H" or "AB43H", so 12H is set in the first effect register 233b, and the first effect register 233b is set to 2 Set 12H in the effect register 233c (S1724), and shift to the process of S1726 of FIG. As a result, the first pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation +1.5 seconds extension" mode, and the second pseudo-variation effect is executed in the "off-variation +1.5 seconds extension" mode ( See FIG. 13 (d)).

Further, as a result of the processing of S1718, when the value of the variable P is not 4 (S1718: No), the variation effect according to other display variation pattern commands is set, and when the variable P is distributed to the pseudo variation effect, the variation effect is set. A value corresponding to the number of distributions is set in the distribution number counter 233a, and when distribution is not performed in a pseudo variable effect, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is set to 0 (S1725), and the process proceeds to S1726 in FIG. Transition.

Returning to FIG. 32, in the process of S1726, it is determined whether or not the 0th bit of the upper byte of the display variation pattern command is 1. Then, if it is 1 (S1726: Yes), it is determined that the voice lamp control device 113 has notified that the continuous advance notice effect is executed in a special mode, and there is a chance for the stop symbol of the variable effect as the continuous notice effect. The background color for displaying the eyes is set to a special color (red) (S1727), and the process proceeds to S1729. If the 0th bit of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command is not 1 (that is, if it is 0), the background color when the chance eye is displayed on the stop symbol of the variation effect as a continuous advance notice effect is the normal color. Set to (blue) (S1728), and the process proceeds to S1729. As a result, depending on the value of the 0th bit of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display, the background color when displaying the chance eye on the stop symbol of the variable effect as a continuous notice effect can be set as a special color, or the normal color. Can be set to.

Then, in the process of S1729, the stop symbol notified from the voice lamp control process 113 is set by the display stop symbol command, and the process returns to the variation effect process. As a result, when the symbol is stopped in S1612 of the variation effect processing, the stopped symbol set in the processing of S1729 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, as for the stop symbol of the pseudo variation display a plurality of times, the stop symbol set in the process of S1729 can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the chance eye is specified by the display stop symbol command, the chance eye can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the symbol is stopped in S1612 of the variation effect processing, and also. The third symbol display device 81 can display the chance eye even for the stop symbol of the pseudo variation display a plurality of times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the variation effect setting process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a variation effect setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114. This variation effect setting process is executed in the variation effect process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 (see S1606 in FIG. 31), and as described above, the pseudo variation distribution process (FIG. 32). And FIG. 33), it is a process of setting the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the pseudo variation effect sorted in FIG. 33). Further, when it is not distributed to the pseudo-variation effect, it is a process of setting the effect mode of the variation effect determined in the pseudo-variation distribution process (see FIGS. 32 and 33).

In this variation effect processing, first, the value obtained by adding one from the distribution number counter 233a is assigned to the variable X (S1801), and the contents of the Xth effect register specified by the variable X are assigned to the variable Y (S1802). That is, if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 2, the content of the third effect register 233d is assigned to the variable Y, and if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 1, the content of the second effect register 233c is the variable Y. If the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 0, the contents of the first effect register 233b are assigned to the variable Y.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1803), and if the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1803: Yes), the lower 4 of the variable Y is further determined. It is determined whether or not the value of the bit is 3 (S1804). When the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1804: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 23H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, " The "2-second shortened special reach variation + 2-second re-variation" mode is set (S1805), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "2 second shortened special reach variation + 2 second re-variation".

Further, as a result of the processing of S1804, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 3 (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1806). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1806: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 22H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, "2 seconds reduction". The mode of "super reach variation + 2 seconds revariation" is set (S1807), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "2 second shortened super reach variation + 2 second re-variation".

Further, as a result of the processing of S1806, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 (S1806: No), it is determined that the content of the Xth effect register is 21H, and a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is determined. As the effect mode of, the mode of "2 seconds shortened normal reach variation + 2 seconds re-variation" is set (S1808), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "2 seconds shortened normal reach variation + 2 seconds re-variation".

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1803, when the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 (S1803: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1810). If the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1810: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 4 (S1811). When the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 4 (S1811: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 14H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, " The mode of "displacement variation with notice effect" is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the "disappearance variation with notice effect" mode.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1811, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 4 (S1811: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1813). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 3 (S1813: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 13H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, "off variation + The "slip effect" mode is set (S1814), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "disengagement variation + slip effect".

Further, as a result of the processing of S1813, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 3 (S1813: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1815). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 2 (S1815: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 12H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, "off variation +1". The ".5 second extension" mode is set (S1816), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "disengagement variation + 1.5 second extension".

Further, as a result of the processing of S1815, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 2 (S1815: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1817). If the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is 1 (S1817: Yes), the content of the Xth effect register is 11H. Therefore, as an effect mode of the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect, "off variation +1". The "second extension" mode is set (S1818), and the process proceeds to S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the mode of "disengagement variation + 1 second extension".

Further, as a result of the processing of S1817, when the value of the lower 4 bits of the variable Y is not 1 (S1817: No), it is determined that the content of the Xth effect register is 10H, and a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is determined. As the effect mode of the above, the "disengagement variation" mode is set (S1819), and the process proceeds to the process of S1809. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 is executed with a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect in the "disengagement variation" mode.

On the other hand, when the value of the upper 4 bits of the variable Y is not 1 as a result of the processing of S1810 (S1803: No), a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation according to the contents of the variable Y (that is, the Xth effect register). The effect mode of the effect is set (S1820), and the process proceeds to S1809.

In the process of S1809, the value of the distribution number counter 233a is updated. This update is performed by decrementing the value by 1 if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is other than 0, and holding the value if the value of the distribution number counter 233a is 0. As a result, the effect mode is set, the number of times of the pseudo variation effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be counted, and the distribution number counter set when the display variation pattern command is received. A pseudo variation effect of the number of times according to the value of 233a can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the value of the distribution number counter 233a is other than 0, the value is decremented by 1, so that each time the variation effect setting process is executed, the third effect register 233d, the second effect register 233c, and the first effect are executed. According to the order of the registers 233b, a pseudo variation effect can be performed in the effect mode of the contents stored in each.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 and the first symbol display device 37 are based on the lottery result performed on the condition that the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning). The variation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81. At this time, if the variation effect corresponding to the start prize detected in the past is being executed, the variation effect corresponding to the start prize detected this time is suspended. Further, in the main control device 110, as a result of the lottery for the balls that have won the starting prize, the player is given a jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, or even if the player is out of the game. On the other hand, when it becomes a reach that impresses that it is one step before the big hit (reach out of front and back), the continuous notice effect is set to the voice lamp control device 113. Include in and send. If the continuous advance notice permission flag is turned on, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect with a predetermined probability.

Here, the main control device 110 only determines the permission for continuous advance notice based on the result of the lottery for the ball that has won the start prize, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 makes a continuous advance notice effect based on the permission determination. Since the start of the main control device 110 is determined, the processing in the main control device 110 can be concentrated on the lottery processing, while if the MPU 221 processing capacity is used for the voice lamp control device 113, a wide variety of production modes of the continuous notice effect can be set. can do. Further, when the result of the lottery is not only a big hit but also a front-rear out-of-reach reach, the main control device 110 allows continuous advance notice effect, and the information is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 , It is possible to decide the execution of the continuous advance notice effect even in the case of the front-back off reach, and the execution of the continuous advance notice effect can be performed under a wide variety of conditions. As a result, it is possible to give various expectations to the player when the continuous advance notice effect is performed. In addition, even if the lottery results in continuous deviations, the continuous advance notice effect can give the player a high expectation and prevent the player from getting bored. can do.

Further, since the continuous advance notice effect in the present embodiment is set by the voice lamp control device 113 so as to be performed in addition to the variation effect within the execution time of the variation effect allocated by the main control device 110, it is continuous. It is possible to prevent the execution time of the variable effect from becoming long as the advance notice effect is executed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, if there is a start prize at the stage where four variable effects are already reserved, the start prize is ignored, but in the present embodiment, it changes even if the continuous advance notice effect is executed. Since the execution time of the effect can be kept short, the reserved variable effect can be consumed quickly. Therefore, even in the situation where the four fluctuation effects are suspended, the player can continue to drive the ball as it is, so that the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed and the player can use it. On the other hand, it is possible to continuously perform an effect that gives the player a predetermined sense of expectation while giving a chance of a big hit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the variable effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is set so as to be the chance of "3", "4", and "1" without fail. As a result, the reach variation effect is not performed in the variation effect, and the variation effect is stopped even when the third symbols are not aligned in the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped before the middle symbol row Z2. It is possible to give the player the pleasure of displaying the chance eye at times. On the other hand, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed when the variable effect is stopped, such as displaying a chance eye when the variable effect is stopped, there are the following problems.

Judgment as to whether or not to allow the start of the continuous advance notice effect is made based on the values of various counters (see FIG. 6) acquired at that time when the winning of the first ball opening 64 is detected. When it is decided to start the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is executed (display of chance eyes) for all the variable effects that were held before the winning of the first ball opening 64 was detected. ) Is set. Since the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect does not take into consideration the effect mode (whether or not the reach variable effect) of the variable effect that was suspended before the winning of the first ball opening 64 was detected, the continuous advance notice is made. There is a possibility that the effect mode of the variable effect in which the execution of the effect is set is the reach variable effect.

Here, in the reach variation effect, the fluctuations of the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped before the middle symbol row Z2, and the third symbol on the two left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is the five effective lines L1. It is an effect of displaying on the third symbol display device 81 so that they are aligned on at least one effective line among ~ L5, and when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, three symbols are displayed on at least one effective line. This is the most basic effect that can give the player a feeling of expectation that all the third symbols displayed in the rows Z1 to Z3 will be a big hit. The player is looking forward to the appearance of this reach variation effect and is playing the game.

In this way, since the reach variation effect is an effect in which the stopping methods of the three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are characterized, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variation effect whose production mode is the reach variation effect. Even if it is done, the chance eye cannot be displayed as a stop symbol as it is. Therefore, when the effect mode of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is the reach variation effect, it is possible to give priority to the reach variation effect and not to display the chance eye as a stop symbol. , There is a risk of interrupting the sense of continuity that can be given to the player when the chance eyes are displayed over a plurality of variable displays. On the other hand, in order to display the chance eye in the reach variation mode, the left symbol column Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3" and the right symbol column Z3 is stopped at the symbol "1" in the time allocated to the reach variation mode. When the middle symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed at a low speed, the middle symbol row Z1 is displayed at a low speed in a state where the symbols of the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are not aligned, which gives a strange impression to the player. Will be given. Further, within the time allotted to the reach variation mode, the left symbol row Z1 is stopped at the symbol "3", the right symbol row Z3 is stopped at the symbol "3" to display the reach symbol, and then the middle symbol is displayed. Before the row Z2 is stopped, if the right symbol row Z3 is slid and the variable display is performed again to display the symbol "1" on the right symbol row Z3, the player's expectation for reach is hindered. At the same time, the production will be very delayed, and the player will get bored.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. As the effect mode of each pseudo variation effect, it is determined from five types of out-of-range variation effect modes. As a result, if the out-of-order variation mode is a stop symbol other than the jackpot symbol, the stop mode can be freely set, so that it can be easily set as a stop symbol of the pseudo variation effect. it can. Therefore, even if an arbitrary variation pattern is instructed by the main control device 110, the continuous advance notice effect can be reliably performed, so that the player can surely have a feeling of expectation due to the continuous advance notice effect. Can be made. Further, by setting the effect mode of the pseudo variation effect as the deviating variation mode, the data of the deviating variation mode prepared for the normal variation effect can be used as it is. Therefore, since it is not necessary to prepare data for the pseudo fluctuation effect, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity required for distribution to the pseudo variation effect a plurality of times.

Further, since the chance eyes are displayed as the stop symbols in each of the pseudo fluctuation effects distributed to a plurality of times, the chance eyes can be displayed at short time intervals. Therefore, as the variation pattern of the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, even if the normal reach variation mode having a longer variation time is instructed by the main control device 110, the player is informed that the chance eyes are continuously displayed. It can be easily noticed, and the expectation of the player can be gradually increased each time the chance is displayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set, when the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation effect, the pseudo variation effect is performed up to three times. In addition to sorting, immediately after the reach variation effect is performed, the third symbols displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated so that their contents can be slid in a visible manner. It can be changed. Then, a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol of re-variation. As a result, even when the effect mode of the variation effect instructed by the main control device 110 is the reach variation mode, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily executed. Further, even if the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the variation effect can be performed in the reach variation mode, so that the player can be satisfied by performing the variation effect in the reach variation mode that the player is looking forward to. it can.

In addition, since the re-variation is performed after the deviated reach symbol is displayed depending on the reach variation mode, the player is expected to perform some effect even if the jackpot symbol is not displayed depending on the reach variation mode. be able to. Then, by displaying the chance eyes as the stop symbol of the re-variation, the continuous advance notice effect can be performed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit after the subsequent variation effect.

In addition, the continuous advance notice effect in the present embodiment is the same effect in which a chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol in correspondence with each of the variable effects held when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided. Therefore, each time the same effect is repeatedly performed, the player can have a higher expectation.

Here, the "variable effect (variable display)" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first effect" described in the claim, and the "continuous notice effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the claim. Corresponds to the described "second production". Further, the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claim, and the "big hit" described in the above embodiment is the "predetermined game value" described in the claim. Corresponding to the above-described embodiment, the “hold count command” corresponds to the “permission command” described in the claims.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the above embodiment, as the stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is completed, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, the combination of symbols on the middle line L2 is “3”, “4”, “1”). The case where the continuous advance notice effect is executed by continuously displaying the so-called "chance eye" over a plurality of variable effects has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and all the symbols changed by the variable effect The stop order of columns Z1 to Z3 is not the normal left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → middle symbol column Z2, but an order different from the usual order (for example, left symbol column Z1 →) over a plurality of variation effects. The continuous notice effect may be performed by continuously stopping in the middle symbol row Z2 → right symbol row Z3, right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 → left symbol row Z1, etc.). Further, a continuous advance notice effect may be performed by continuously stopping all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 over a plurality of variable effects. Further, even if a continuous advance notice effect is performed by storing a special symbol for continuous effect in the video RAM 234 and displaying the special symbol continuously on the third symbol display device 81 over a plurality of variable effects. Good.

As a result, when the player usually pays attention to the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game, the variation effect is stopped by a predetermined method different from the usual method, or a special symbol is displayed. As a result, if the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the player can be made to instantly recognize that the continuous advance notice effect has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to instantly give the player a predetermined sense of expectation.

Further, among all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, as a stop sound emitted from the voice output device 226 when a part or all of the symbol rows are stopped, a stop sound different from the normal one is continuously emitted over a plurality of fluctuation effects. A continuous notice production may be performed. Here, as the stop sound different from the usual one, a different kind of stop sound may be emitted, or a stop sound having a different volume or pitch may be emitted. As a result, the player usually pays attention to the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and plays the game, but the continuous advance notice effect is produced by a "sound" different from that of the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed. By performing the above, the player can easily recognize that the effect different from the usual one has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation.

In addition, by controlling the door solenoid 87a by the display control device 114, the door 87 may be opened and closed together with the fluctuation effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory different from the door 87 that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Good. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33 of the pachinko machine 10 together with the variation effect under the control of the voice lamp control device 113.

As a result, each time the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the accessory such as the door 87 operates in a predetermined mode (for example, the opening / closing operation of the door 87). By lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit. In addition, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, and continues the game, but the door 87 and other accessories and the illumination units 29 to 33 perform the continuous advance notice effect. By making it possible, the player can easily recognize that an unusual effect has been performed. Further, the continuous advance notice effect can be easily performed by simple control such as operation of an accessory such as the door 87 and lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. When the pachinko machine 10 performs the continuous advance notice effect by causing the main control device 110 to perform the lottery in the above, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variable effect. Each process can be shared by the control device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

In addition, the display of the chance eye in the third symbol display device 81, the change of the stop order of the symbol sequence, the display of the special symbol, the operation of the accessory such as the door 87 in a predetermined mode, the audio output from the audio output device 226, and A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is performed by continuously displaying the same chance eyes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous advance notice effect is a series of related effects. It may be performed over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the continuous advance notice effect may be performed by displaying the character displayed when the variation effect is stopped in the order of "egg", "chick", and "chicken" each time the variation effect is performed. As a result, as a series of related productions progresses, the player can have a higher expectation.

In the above embodiment, the case of sorting from five types of deviation fluctuation modes in the distribution to a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the normal “displacement fluctuation” mode is described. On the other hand, there is a "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 seconds extension + slip effect" mode in which a slip effect is added to the "disengagement fluctuation + 1.5 seconds extension" mode in which the high-speed fluctuation time of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is 1.5 seconds longer. It may be sorted, or the "displacement variation with notice effect + slip effect" mode in which the slide effect is added may be distributed to the "displacement variation with notice effect" mode in which the notice effect is performed. In addition, the time required for the advance notice effect in the "out-of-line fluctuation with advance notice effect" mode in which the advance notice effect is performed is extended or shortened in the "out-of-date change with advance notice effect + time extension" mode or the "out-of-date change with notice effect + time reduction" mode May be sorted, or the "displacement variation with notice effect + time extension + slip effect" mode in which a slip effect is further added may be distributed to the "disappearance variation with notice effect + time extension" mode. Further, the "disengagement fluctuation + time reduction" mode in which the high-speed fluctuation time of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened as compared with the normal "disengagement fluctuation" mode may be distributed. From these effect modes, by appropriately distributing the variation effect, it is possible to distribute the pseudo variation effect to the variation effect in the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 without leaving time for the variation effect. The number of pseudo variation effects can be kept low in one variation effect.

In the above embodiment, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a mode in which a slide effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, a chance eye is always displayed as a stop symbol with a high probability. It may be set to be done. For example, when a normal fluctuation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in the "disengaged variation + slip effect" mode, the chance eye is always displayed with a high probability as the stop symbol. After the player recognizes that the player is out of alignment by the "disengagement fluctuation" mode, the sliding effect is performed, so that the player can be given a high expectation that a chance eye is displayed. In addition, when a normal fluctuation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in the "reach variation + slide effect" mode, if the stop symbol is displayed with a high probability or the chance eye is always displayed. After giving the player a sense of expectation by the "reach fluctuation" mode, after the player recognizes that it is out of the way, the sliding effect is performed, so that the player has a high expectation. Can be given again. Further, in these cases, by performing the sliding effect, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation that the chance eyes are continuously displayed.

On the other hand, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a mode in which a slide effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, a stop symbol is displayed with a high probability or other than the chance eye. It may be set as follows. For example, when a "slip effect" is performed after the "displacement fluctuation" mode, if the stop symbol is displayed with a high probability or other than the chance eye, after the "disengagement fluctuation" mode. When the "slip effect" is performed, it is possible to make the player predict that the chance eye will not be displayed. In addition, for example, when the "slip effect" is performed after the "reach fluctuation" mode, if the chance eye is always displayed with a high probability as the stop symbol, the "reach fluctuation" mode When the "slip effect" is performed later, the player can have a higher expectation for the slide effect. When the variation effect for which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set is distributed to the pseudo variation effect, the "predetermined effect + slip effect" mode in which a stop symbol other than the chance eye is displayed is the pseudo variation. It may not be selected as the production mode of the production.

Further, when the effect mode in the normal variation effect or the pseudo variation effect in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is not set is the mode in which the slide effect is added to the predetermined effect mode, the effect is likely to stop or be sure to stop. In a normal variable effect or a pseudo variable effect in which a stop symbol is set so that a symbol other than the chance eye is displayed and execution of a continuous notice effect is set, a slip effect is added to a predetermined effect mode. In any case, the stop symbol may be set with a high probability or so that the chance eye is always displayed as the stop symbol. As a result, when a normal variation effect or a pseudo variation effect is performed in a mode in which a slide effect is added to a predetermined effect mode, if the chance eye is displayed as a stop symbol, a continuous notice effect is performed. It is possible to easily make the player recognize that this is the case.

In the above embodiment, by the continuous advance notice setting process (see FIG. 28), the distribution to the pseudo variation effect and the pseudo variation effect are distributed based on the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110. The case where the effect mode is set and the display variation pattern command is set according to the effect mode has been described. However, in this process, a table in which the variation time due to the variation pattern and the display variation pattern command are associated is stored in ROM 222. By referring to this table, a display variation pattern command may be set from the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed by the main control unit 110, or software processing may be performed without using the table. May be done by. When the display variation pattern command is set from the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 with reference to the table, the setting process can be easily and appropriately performed. Further, when the display variation pattern command is set from the variation time according to the variation pattern instructed by the main control device 110 by software processing, a table is not required, so that an increase in the storage capacity of the memory can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is "1" (see S1101 in FIG. 26), and predetermined conditions (conditions 1 to 1 described above). When any of 3) is satisfied (see S1105 to S1110 in FIG. 26), the case where the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S1114 and S1115 in FIG. 26) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, when the value of the first bit (that is, the continuous advance notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is "1", the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability (see S1114 and S1115 of FIG. 26). ), It may be confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, and if none of the conditions is satisfied, the decision to start the continuous advance notice effect may be rejected. Further, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability, the value of the hold number counter 223a is set in the continuous notice number counter 223c (see S1116 in FIG. 26), and the hold corresponding to the hold number command received this time is held. After the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for all the reserved balls held before the ball, it is confirmed whether or not the above-mentioned conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied, and if none of the conditions is satisfied. , The value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c may be returned to the value before the setting, and the execution setting of the continuous advance notice effect may be deleted to reject the decision to start the continuous advance notice effect. In this case, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined with a predetermined probability and the value of the hold number counter 223a is set in the continuous advance notice number counter 223c, the continuous advance notice number counter 223c before setting the value of the hold number counter 223a. And the value of the state flag 223d after continuous notice are saved in RAM 223, and if none of the above conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied, the value saved in RAM 223 is saved in the continuous notice counter 223c and By resetting the state flag 223d after the continuous notice, the value of the continuous notice number counter 223c and the state flag 223d after the continuous notice may be returned to the values before the setting, and the execution setting of the continuous notice effect may be deleted. .. As a result, if any of the above conditions 1 to 3 is not satisfied, the continuous advance notice effect execution can be prevented from being set.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the above (condition 2), between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold count command and the last variable effect (holding ball) in which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set. The existence of two or more variable effects (holding balls) is one requirement, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, when the maximum number of holdings is large (for example, 8), Increase the number of variable effects (holding balls) that should exist between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold count command and the last variable effect (holding ball) for which execution of the continuous notice effect is set. (For example, 4 or more) may be used. As a result, there are many variable effects (holding balls) between the variable effect (holding ball) corresponding to the hold count command and the last variable effect (holding ball) in which the execution of the continuous notice effect is set. If this is not the case, the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined, and as a result, the number of variable effects in which the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed can be increased.

In the above embodiment, in the main control device 110, when the result of the determination based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning is a big hit and the display mode is the first probabilistic jackpot (15R probabilistic jackpot), and When the result of the judgment based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start winning is out of order and the display mode is out of front / back reach, the first bit (continuous notice permission flag) of the upper byte of the hold count command is set to "1". The case where the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the permission to start the continuous notice effect is described (see S410 to S420 in FIG. 18), but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the continuous notice permission flag is used. The condition for setting "1" may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 10. For example, based on the values of various counters acquired at the time of starting winning, the production mode of the fluctuation effect ("special reach variation effect", "super reach variation effect", "normal reach variation effect", "off variation effect", etc. Or, at the time of disengagement, the permission to start the continuous notice production may be determined and the continuous notice permission flag may be set according to the production mode such as "reach of front and rear disengagement", "reach other than front and rear disengagement", and "complete disengagement"). .. In addition, the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1" when the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning is a random number value that becomes a big hit, and the continuous notice permission flag is set to "0" when the value is out of the range. May be set. In this case, it is suggested to the player that if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed together with all the pending variation effects, the final variable effect that has been reserved will surely be a big hit. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player.

Further, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired at the time of starting winning is a random number value that is a big hit, when the continuous notice permission flag is set to "1", the big hit type is set in the voice lamp control device 113. Depending on (the first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), the second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), the time saving jackpot), the production mode of the continuous notice production (for example, the background color, the combination of the symbols used for the chance eyes). , Types of production modes that are distributed as pseudo-variable effects, etc.) may be switched. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be generated according to the production mode of the continuous advance notice effect. In this case, the hold count command includes the jackpot type (first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), time saving jackpot) that occurs after the end of continuous notice. By transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 can switch the effect mode of the continuous notice effect according to the hit type of the jackpot.

Further, the permission to start the continuous notice effect may be determined according to the number of variable effects (number of holds) held at the time of the start winning, and the continuous notice permission flag may be set. As a result, for example, the probability of permitting the start of the continuous advance notice effect when the number of hold times is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times, or the start of the continuous notice effect when the number of hold times is large, and the continuous advance notice when the number of hold times is small If the probability is higher than the probability of permitting the start of the effect, there is a high possibility that the continuous advance notice effect will be continuously performed over a predetermined number or more of the variable effects. As a result, the player can recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed over a predetermined number or more of the variable effects, so that the effect different from the normal effect is performed, which is special to the player. You can have a good sense of expectation. Furthermore, the result of the judgment based on the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start winning, the production mode of the variation effect selected based on the values of the various counters acquired at the time of the start winning, and the variation held at the time of the start winning. A combination of any two or more of the number of effects (number of holds) may be used to determine permission to start the continuous notice effect and set the continuous notice permission flag.

In the above embodiment, when it is determined whether or not the main control device 110 allows the start of the continuous advance notice effect (see S410 to S420 in FIG. 18), the start of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted (the first of the upper bytes). When the bit (continuous notice permission flag) is set to "1"), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect according to the continuous notice determination probability set by the continuous notice determination table 222a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous advance notice determination table may be stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the main control device 110 may determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed. .. In this case, the hold count command may be used to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to execute the continuous advance notice effect from the main control device 110.

In addition, the determination result (big hit, miss) determined by the main control device 110 based on the values of various counters acquired when the ball starts and wins by the hold count command or following the hold count command, and the determination result thereof. If the judgment result is a big hit, the hit type (1st probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot), 2nd probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot), time saving jackpot), and if the judgment result is wrong, the final stop pattern (front and back loss) At least one of reach, reach other than front-rear and complete reach) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 starts continuous advance notice production based on this information. You may decide whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Alternatively, the main control of each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 when the ball starts and wins a prize by the hold count command or following the hold count command. It may be transmitted from the device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 may make all determinations as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed. In these cases, since the main control device 113 does not determine the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect or whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the processing load applied to the main control device 113 can be further reduced, and the start prize is won. It is possible to prevent delays and malfunctions in the lottery process performed on the ball. In particular, in the latter case, it is not necessary to determine whether the ball is a big hit or a miss based on the acquired values of various counters when the ball is started and won, in addition to the lottery process, that is, the first random number counter C1 Since it is not necessary to compare with the random number values that are a plurality of jackpots stored in the jackpot random number table, the processing load on the main control device 113 can be surely reduced.

In the above embodiment, the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect determined by the main controller 110 in the timer interrupt process in which the start detection is performed is permitted by the first bit of the upper byte of the hold count command (continuous notice permission flag). ) Has been described, but the case is not limited to this, and a continuous notice command (permission command) for notifying the permission to start the continuous notice production is transmitted following the hold count command. You may. Further, in the above embodiment, the game state (big hit or miss) after the end of the continuous notice effect notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the 0th bit (game state flag after continuous notice) of the upper byte of the hold count command. May be included in the continuous advance notice command and transmitted. In these cases, the continuous advance notice command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 following the hold count command only when the main control device 110 determines that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted. It may be configured so that the presence / absence of permission to start the continuous advance notice effect can be notified, and the continuous notice command may always be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 following the hold count command.

In the above embodiment, different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each other depending on the game state (“big hit”, “off”) after the end of the continuous notice effect and the number of times the variable effect held in the main control device 110 is held. The case of changing the continuous advance notice determination probability has been described using the continuous advance notice determination table 222a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect (“big hit”, “missing”). The continuous advance notice determination probability may be changed by using the continuous advance notice determination table in which different continuous advance notice determination ranges are associated with each other according to only one of the hold count of the variation effect held in the main control device 110 and .. Further, when associating different continuous notice determination ranges according to the number of holds, the number of holds may be divided into several groups and different continuous notice determination ranges may be associated with each group, or the number of holds may be less than a predetermined number. In the case of, the continuous advance notice determination range may not be set so that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined. In the latter case, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed together with the reserved variable effect of a predetermined number of times or more. As a result, the player can recognize that the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more, so that the effect different from the normal effect is performed, which is special to the player. You can have a sense of expectation.

In addition, the production mode of the fluctuation effect ("special reach variation effect", "super reach variation effect", "normal reach variation effect", "disengagement variation effect", and "front and back out reach", "other than front and back out" The continuous advance notice determination probability may be changed by using the continuous advance notice determination table in which different continuous advance notice determination ranges are associated with each other depending on the effect mode such as "reach" and "completely off". A combination of at least one of the game state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect and the number of hold times of the variable effect held by the main control device 110, or a series in which different continuous notice determination probabilities are associated according to these three combinations. The notice determination table may be used to change the continuous notice determination probability.

As a result, for example, if the continuous advance notice determination range is associated with each effect mode so that the continuous advance notice determination probability increases in the order of the out-of-order variation effect, the normal reach variation effect, the super reach variation effect, and the special reach variation, it is suspended. When a continuous advance notice effect is performed together with all the variable effects, it is suggested to the player that the production mode of the last reserved variable effect is likely to be a super reach variable effect or a special reach variable effect. can do. Here, the normal reach variation effect, the super reach variation effect, and the special reach variation may be a combination of predetermined symbols when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped (stopped), that is, a jackpot. It is a mode that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of becoming, and further, the special reach variation effect is more for the player than the super reach variation mode, and the super reach variation effect is more for the player than the normal reach variation effect. Since it is a mode that can give a stronger expectation to the jackpot, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player when the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed together with the all-held variable effect. ..

Further, the effect mode of the variable effect may be divided into several groups, and different continuous advance notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. For example, the deviation variation effect and the reach variation effect including the normal reach variation effect, the super reach variation effect, and the special reach variation effect may be divided into different continuous notice determination ranges. Further, the continuous advance notice determination range may not be set in some production modes so that the start of the continuous advance notice effect is not determined. For example, the continuous advance notice determination range is not set for the out-of-order variation effect, and the start of the continuous advance notice effect is decided only in the case of the reach variation effect such as the normal reach variation effect, the super reach variation effect, and the special reach variation effect. Good. In this case, if the continuous advance notice effect is executed, the player can be sure that the last pending effect of the variable effect is, for example, a normal reach variable effect, a super reach variable effect, or a special reach variable effect. Can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high expectation.

On the other hand, in the above-described embodiment, in the continuous advance notice determination table, the case where different continuous advance notice determination ranges are associated with the two states of "big hit" and "off" as the game states after the end of the continuous advance notice effect has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, different continuous notice determination ranges are associated with each state of "first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)", "second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", "time saving jackpot", and "off". You may. Further, these states may be divided into several groups, and different continuous advance notice determination ranges may be associated with each group. As a result, for example, the probability of continuous advance notice determination increases in the order of "first probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot)", "second probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)", "time saving jackpot", and "missing". , If the continuous advance notice determination range is associated with each game state, if the continuous advance notice effect is continuously performed together with all the reserved variable effects, after the last reserved variable effect is completed, It can be suggested that there is a high probability that the gaming state will be more advantageous for the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player. In this modification, the main control device 110 determines whether or not the continuous advance notice is started, or the voice lamp control device 113 directly starts the continuous advance notice without determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect in the main control device 110. If the result of the lottery is "big hit" in the main control device 110, it is useful in determining the permission to start the continuous advance notice effect.

In the above embodiment, the stop symbol of the last variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is an audio lamp based on the stop symbol (front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete out of reach) determined by the main control device 110. The case where the setting is made by the control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the voice lamp control device 113 decides to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the last suspended variable effect is stopped. If the symbol is not a big hit, the stop symbol of the last variation effect may be set by replacing it with a stop symbol in the front-rear reach mode instead of the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110. In this case, when the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 1, it may be determined that the continuous advance notice effect is the last variable effect to be performed. Then, in the variation display process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, in the process of setting the stop symbol of the variation effect (S1207), the stop symbol of the variation effect is off, and the continuous advance notice number counter. It is determined whether or not the value of 223c is 1 (that is, the last variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed), and as a result, the stop symbol of the variable effect is out of order, and the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c. When is 1, in the process of S1207, a stop symbol corresponding to the front-back disengagement reach may be set as the stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol of the final variable effect in which the continuous advance notice effect is performed is not the stop symbol defined by the main control device 110, but always has a front-rear out-of-front reach, which gives the player a high expectation. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous advance notice effect is always executed on the third symbol display device 81 when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the continuous advance notice effect is not limited to this. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player in the situation where the execution of the effect is determined, the continuous notice effect may be executed on the third symbol display 81.

In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. , All symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Even if such an image is displayed instead of the high-speed fluctuation, when allocating to a pseudo fluctuation effect, when shortening or extending the time required for the fluctuation effect, a reduced image or a snow noise-like image is displayed. Even if the image corresponding to the shortened or extended time is removed from the image or repeated, the discontinuity of the variation effect caused by the removal or repetition of the image is easily suppressed from being recognized by the player. Can be done.

In the above embodiment, the case where one first ball opening 64 for starting the big hit lottery when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the ball entry is detected independently and the big hit lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each first ball entry port, the hold count command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 is information indicating which first ball entry port is the hold. May be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold count counter is prepared for each first entry port, and when a hold count command is received, the hold for the first entry port indicated by the hold count command is held. When the number of holds is set in the number counter and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold count counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the number of holds is counted for each first entry port. can do.

Further, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the continuous advance notice number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the maximum number of holdings that can be held by all the first ball ports (that is, each of them). For the variable effect (holding ball) of the number of times obtained by adding the maximum number of holdings that can be held by the first ball opening, the presence or absence of continuous advance notice effect execution in each holding ball is set. May be good. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the hold number command is received, the hold number of the variable effect (hold ball) held by all the first ball entrances at that time. Is calculated by adding the values of all the hold count counters corresponding to each first ball entry, and is held at all the hold count counters before the current hold ball with respect to the continuous notice count counter 223c. The number of reserved balls (that is, the number of times obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of each first entrance at the present time) may be set. As a result, at the time when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, the continuous advance notice effect can be executed over the variable effect held by all the first entrances.

Further, in a pachinko machine in which a plurality of first ball entrances are provided and the variation effect held in one first entry port is preferentially executed, the variation effect is preferentially executed. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be decided only when the ball is entered into the first entrance. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect is not started for the variable effect held at the first entrance of the low priority, so that the continuous advance notice effect is given to the variable effect held at the first entrance of the low priority. Is started, and when the variable effect is continuously held at the first ball entrance having a high priority, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuous advance notice effect does not end easily.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold count counter 223a is reduced by 1 (see S1211 in FIG. 27), but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, in the variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 16), the hold count counter of the main control unit 110 is subtracted as the variation pattern command is set by the variation start processing (S206). A hold count command is set so that the value (N) of 203a is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S204 in FIG. 16), and the hold count command is the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the above. In this case, the hold count command may be generated so that the continuous notice permission flag and the game status flag after the continuous notice are both "0". In this case, the process of S1211 in FIG. 27 is omitted.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines to start the continuous advance notice effect when the hold count command is received, the continuous advance notice effect is executed for all the variable effects held at that time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, it may be further determined whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect may or may not appear for each variable effect, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the continuous advance notice effect, and the effect that does not make the player bored is performed. Can be done. In this case, it is updated every time the variation display process (FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 110, and a counter for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect in each variation effect is provided. May be good. Then, in the fluctuation display processing, when the fluctuation start flag is on, if the value of the continuous advance notice number counter 223c is 2 or more and the value of the counter is a predetermined value, the corresponding fluctuation effect is generated. You may set the continuous advance notice effect execution. Further, in this case, the number (range) of a predetermined value of the counter that sets the continuous advance notice effect execution for the corresponding variable effect may be changed according to the conditions. As this condition, for example, the value of the hold count counter 223a when determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, and the content of the effect mode of the variable effect for which the determination is made (super reach variable effect, normal reach variable effect, etc.) A production mode such as an out-of-bounds fluctuation effect, or in the case of an out-of-bounds, a front-back detachment reach, a reach other than the front-back detachment, a complete detachment) The above combinations can be mentioned. As a result, the probability that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined in each variable effect is changed according to the conditions, so that the player can pay attention to the appearance ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in each variable effect. ..

In the above embodiment, the case where the door solenoid 87a for opening and closing the door 87 is controlled by the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the door solenoid 87a is turned on by the voice lamp control device 113. It may be connected to the output port 225 and controlled by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot determination in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect of the start winning process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control device 110, the jackpot of the variable effect corresponding to the start prize detected by the process of S401 It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state when the lottery is performed in the fluctuation start process (that is, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination is on), and the start permission determination of the continuous notice effect is determined. If the pachinko machine 10 at the time point is in the high probability state (that is, if the probability changing flag 203b is on), the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c is selected and the value of the random number to be the jackpot is set. , The case where the jackpot judgment is simply performed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the value of 30 big hit random numbers stored in the high probability big hit random number table 202b "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420" , 448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”, 10 random numbers were extracted, and the extracted random numbers were extracted. The value may be set as the value of a random number that becomes a jackpot used in the jackpot determination. In this case, if the values of 30 random numbers are arranged in order and stored in the high-probability jackpot random number table 202b, the values of 10 random numbers may be extracted at equal intervals according to the order, or from the beginning. The values of the 10th random number may be extracted, or the values of the 10 random numbers stored in the middle or the last of the high probability jackpot random number table 202b may be extracted. Further, the value of a random number that becomes 10 jackpots may be randomly extracted from the high probability jackpot random number table 202b, and 10 jackpots extracted from the high probability jackpot random number table 202b each time a simple jackpot determination is performed. You may change the value of the random number that becomes. Even with this, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state and both the big hit lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice production are performed by one timer interrupt process, the big hit lottery is a high probability big hit. The lottery can be reliably performed based on the value of the 30 jackpot random numbers set by the random number table 202b, and the lottery is extracted from the high probability jackpot random number table 202b in the permission determination for starting the continuous advance notice effect. Since the jackpot determination is simply performed based on the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of 10, the processing time can be shortened, and the timer interrupt process in which the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice effect are performed. Can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process. Further, since it is not necessary to separately provide the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the ROM 202.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the above-described modification, in the jackpot determination in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect of the start-up prize process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control device 110, the start-up prize detected by the process of S401 is used. It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time when the jackpot lottery of the corresponding fluctuation effect is performed in the fluctuation start process (that is, the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous notice determination is on), and the continuous notice is given. When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (that is, the probability changing flag 203b is on) at the time of determining the start permission of the effect, it is set by the simple high probability time jackpot random number table 202c, or when the probability is high. The case where the jackpot judgment is simply performed by using the random number values of 10 jackpots extracted from the jackpot random number table 202b has been described, but it is not always limited to using the random number values of 10 jackpots. Absent. In this case, the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot depends on the performance of the main control device 110 and the processing load, and both the jackpot lottery and the permission determination for the start of the continuous notice production can be performed in one timer interrupt process. If this is done, it may be set as many as possible to be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot determination in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect of the start winning process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control device 110, the jackpot of the variable effect corresponding to the start prize detected by the process of S401 It is estimated that the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state when the lottery is performed in the fluctuation start process (that is, the probability changing flag 203c for continuous notice determination is on), and the start permission determination of the continuous notice effect is determined. When the pachinko machine 10 at the time point is in a high probability state (that is, the probability changing flag 203b is on), the jackpot determination can be simplified by selecting the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c as the jackpot random number table. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and in such a case, the jackpot determination may not be executed. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state and both the fluctuation start and the start prize are detected by one timer interrupt process, the jackpot random number at the time of high probability is obtained in the jackpot lottery accompanying the fluctuation start. The lottery can be reliably performed based on the random numbers of 30 jackpots set by the table 202b, and the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the start winning is not executed. The time can be omitted, and the timer interrupt process in which both the fluctuation start and the start winning prize are detected can be completed by the start of the next timer interrupt process.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot determination in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect of the start winning process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control device 110, the probability change in progress flag 203c and the probability change in progress flag 203b for continuous advance notice determination are used. The game state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 estimated at the time when the jackpot lottery of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the start winning prize detected by the processing of S401 is performed in the fluctuation start processing, and the continuation. Depending on the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state) of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start permission judgment of the advance notice effect, the jackpot random number table used in the jackpot determination is set to the jackpot random number table 202a at low probability, at high probability. The case where either the jackpot random number table 202b or the simple high-probability jackpot random number table 202c is set has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect based on the value of the probability changing flag 203b, the jackpot determination is performed using the low probability jackpot random number table 202a, and the continuous advance notice effect is produced. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time of the start permission determination, the jackpot determination may be performed using the simple high probability jackpot random number table 202c. Further, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect based on the value of the probability changing flag 203b, the jackpot determination is performed using the low probability jackpot random number table 202a, and the continuous advance notice effect is produced. If the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state at the time of the start permission determination, the jackpot determination may not be executed. Even with these, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state and both the fluctuation start and the start prize are detected by one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery accompanying the fluctuation start is a jackpot at high probability. It is possible to reliably draw the lottery based on the value of the 30 big hit random numbers set by the random number table 202b, and whether the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the start winning is simply executed. Since it is not executed, the processing time can be shortened or omitted, and the timer interrupt processing in which both the fluctuation start and the start winning prize are detected is completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing. be able to.

In these cases, since the probability change during probability change flag 203c for continuous advance notice determination is not referred to, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of determination of the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect is a low probability state, it is detected by the processing of S401. Even if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 estimated at the time when the jackpot lottery of the variable effect corresponding to the start winning is performed in the variable start process is a high probability state, the jackpot random number table 202b at the time of high probability is normally displayed. Where the jackpot should be determined by using, the jackpot determination will be performed using the jackpot random number table 202a at the time of low probability, but the result of the jackpot determination here is only used for the permission determination of the start of the continuous notice effect. is there. Therefore, this does not pose a problem because it only affects the presence or absence of the display of the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 and does not affect the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

In the above embodiment, in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect of the start winning process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control device 110, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired with the start winning is a big hit. The case where the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect is performed depending on whether or not it is shown has been described, but the concept of the present invention is also applied to the case where the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect is performed based on another condition. It is possible. That is, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of determining the start permission of the continuous advance notice effect is in the high probability state based on the value of the probability changing flag 203b, is it possible to simply determine the condition in the start permission determination of the continuous advance notice effect? Alternatively, it may be unexecuted. For example, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is permitted if the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired in connection with the start winning prize indicates either "reach out of front / back" or "reach other than out of front / back", the continuous notice effect is displayed. If the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of the start permission determination is in the high probability state, the table referred to at the start of the variation effect ("98,99" is stored as the value to be determined as "front and back out reach", and "front and back out of front and back" Not as a table in which "90 to 97" is stored as a value to be judged as "other than reach", but as a simple table in which the number of counter values stored is smaller than this table (for example, as a value to be judged as "out of front and back reach"). A table in which "99" is stored and "95 to 97" is stored as a value for determining "reach other than front-back deviation") may be used to simply determine whether or not the above conditions are satisfied. .. Alternatively, this determination may not be executed. Even with this, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state and both the fluctuation start and the start prize are detected by one timer interrupt process, the jackpot lottery accompanying the fluctuation start is a jackpot at high probability. It is possible to reliably draw the lottery based on the value of the 30 big hit random numbers set by the random number table 202b, and whether the permission determination for the start of the continuous advance notice effect accompanying the start winning is simply executed. Since it is not executed, the processing time can be shortened or omitted, and the timer interrupt processing in which both the fluctuation start and the start winning prize are detected is completed by the start of the next timer interrupt processing. be able to.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In this case, the continuous notice determination table shown in FIG. 8 is provided in the program ROM 232 of the display control device 114, and the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided in the RAM 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above embodiment. A hold count counter, a continuous notice determination counter, a continuous notice count counter, a continuous notice post-state flag, a continuous notice mode flag, and an effect mode counter may be provided having the same functions as the above. Then, when the main control device 110 notifies the start permission of the continuous notice effect by the hold count command, the display control device 114 may perform the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 26 to determine the start of the continuous notice effect. Good. In addition, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the continuous advance notice determination process, the variation pattern command that instructs the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern for the variation effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is mainly used. When transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 has a plurality of pseudo-pseudo according to FIG. 10 based on the fluctuation time instructed by the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the effect mode counter 223f. After allocating to the variation effect, the pseudo variation effect may be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device and may be configured to transmit a command instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp from the display control device to the voice lamp control device.

Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one sub-control device. When the main control device 110 notifies the sub-control device of permission to start the continuous notice effect by the hold count command, the sub-control device performs the continuous notice determination process shown in FIG. 26 to perform the continuous notice effect. You may decide to start. In addition, when the start of the continuous advance notice effect is determined by the continuous advance notice determination process, the variation pattern command that instructs the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern for the variation effect for which the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set is mainly used. When transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub-control device, the fluctuation time and the effect mode counter 223f instructed by the fluctuation pattern command are not generated by the continuous advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 28. Based on the value, the pseudo variation effect may be divided into a plurality of pseudo variation effects according to FIG. 10, and then the pseudo variation effect may be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is different by the number of times the variable display is held, even in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or by the number of times the area divided into four is held. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of hold times. You may.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontally The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from that of the present embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

It should be noted that, for example, in a slot machine, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown.

Identification based on the detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition, the acquisition means for acquiring random information when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means. A main control means having a selection means for selecting a mode of the first effect which is a dynamic display of information, and the first effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. A combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is present, including a sub-control unit having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the embodiment. A game machine that gives a player a predetermined game value when it is issued, and the main control means determines whether or not to perform a second effect different from the first effect. A means and a permission transmission means for transmitting a permission command for permitting execution of the second effect to the sub-control means when the determination means determines that the second effect is to be performed. The sub-control means is based on receiving a storage means for storing the number of times of waiting for the first effect executed by the first effect executing means and a permission command transmitted by the permission transmitting means. In each of the first effects stored in the storage means for the number of waiting times, the second effect is executed in addition to the first effect within the time allocated to the execution of the first effect. A second effect that executes the second effect when the setting means that can be set and the first effect to which the second effect is added by the setting means are executed by the first effect executing means. A game machine 1 comprising an execution means.

According to the game machine 1, the first mode of production is selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition in the main control means. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect executing means as the first effect in the selected mode. Further, in the main control means, whether or not to perform a second effect different from the first effect is determined by the determination means, and as a result, when it is determined to perform the second effect, the second effect is performed. The permission command for permitting the execution of the effect of is transmitted to the sub control means by the permission transmission means of the main control means. On the other hand, when the establishment of the start condition is detected in the main control means, the first effect corresponding to the establishment of the start condition detected in the past is being executed by the first effect execution means of the sub control means. The first effect corresponding to the establishment of the detected start condition is waited for, and the number of times of waiting is stored in the storage means provided in the sub control means. Then, when the permission command transmitted from the main control means is received in the sub control means, it is assigned to the execution of the first effect in each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. In the time, the second effect can be executed in addition to the first effect, the first effect is set by the setting means of the sub-control means, and the second effect is added to the first effect. When executed by the effect executing means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

As a result, for example, when it is determined that the transition to the game state in which the player is given a predetermined game value is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, the determination means of the main control means. If it is determined that the second effect is to be performed by the sub-control means, each time the first effect that has been waiting when the start condition is satisfied is executed by the first effect execution means, the second effect is performed. In addition to the first effect, the second effect can be executed by the second effect executing means. Therefore, if the second effect is continuously executed together with the first effect, after all the waiting first effects are completed, the game state of the game machine is changed to the player. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation to transition to a gaming state that gives a predetermined gaming value.

In the game machine 1, whether or not the determination means performs the second effect based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. A game machine 2 characterized by making a determination.

According to the game machine 2, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. As a result, for example, when it is determined that the transition to the gaming state in which the player is given a predetermined game value is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, it is determined by the determination means that the second effect is performed. For example, if the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that were waiting when the start condition is satisfied, the game state of the game machine is changed to the game after the last first effect that was waiting. It is possible to suggest to the player that the player is transitioned to the game state in which the player is given a predetermined game value. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the gaming state of the gaming machine transitions to a gaming state that imparts a predetermined gaming value.

In the game machine 2, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. 3. A game machine characterized in that the information is performed.

The first aspect of the effect selected by the selection means is that in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the stopped identification information is a predetermined identification. It includes an expected mode (reach mode) that constitutes a part of a combination of information, and a normal mode (completely deviated mode) that causes a display result other than a predetermined combination of identification information to appear without the expected mode. There may be. In addition, after a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display depending on the expected mode, the remaining identification information is other than the combination of the predetermined identification information and is highly related to the predetermined identification information (identification information). For example, when the identification information is represented by a number, it is dynamically depending on the first deviation expected mode (front-back deviation reach mode) in which the numerical value indicated by the predetermined identification information and the identification information indicating the numerical value before and after it stays, or the expected mode. After a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the display, the remaining identification information is not a combination of the predetermined identification information, and the identification information having a low relevance to the predetermined identification information is stopped. (Reach mode other than front-back disengagement) may be included.

According to the game machine 3, whether or not to perform the second effect is determined by the determination means based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means. As a result, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the game that the mode of the last first effect that has been waiting is a predetermined mode. Since it can be suggested to the person, it is possible to expect the player to perform the first effect in a predetermined mode.

In the game machine 3, the mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is that in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the identification information is stopped. The stagnant identification information includes an expected mode that constitutes a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information, and the determination means is such that the first effect selected by the selection means is dynamically displayed in the expected mode. The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is to be performed on the condition that the second effect is performed.

According to the game machine 4, as a mode of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped and the stop is performed in the middle of the dynamic display. When the identified identification information includes an expected mode that constitutes a part of a predetermined combination of identification information, one of the conditions is that the first effect selected by the selection means is a dynamic display in the expected mode. , It is determined by the determination means that the second effect is performed. As a result, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the player is informed that the mode of the last first effect that has been waiting is the expected mode. Can be suggested. Here, the expected mode is that there is a possibility of a combination of predetermined identification information when all the identification information is stopped, that is, a game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine gives the player a predetermined gaming value. This is an aspect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transition to the state. Therefore, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, it is possible to give a high expectation to the player.

The "normal reach variation effect", "super reach variation effect", and "special reach variation effect" described in each of the above embodiments correspond to the above "expected mode".

In any of the game machines 1 to 4, the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect based on the number of times of waiting for the first effect executed by the first effect execution means. A game machine 5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine 5, it is determined by the determining means whether or not to perform the second effect based on the number of times of waiting for the first effect executed by the first effect executing means. Here, the second effect is performed corresponding to the first effect corresponding to the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. Therefore, for example, it is determined that the second effect is performed when the number of times of waiting for the first effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, or that the second effect is performed when the number of times of waiting for the first effect is large. If the probability is made higher than the probability of determining that the second effect is to be performed when the number of times of waiting for the first effect is small, the possibility that the second effect is continuously performed more than a predetermined number of times is high. .. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect is continuously performed a predetermined number of times or more, so that the effect different from the normal effect is performed, which is special to the player. You can have a good sense of expectation.

In any of the game machines 1 to 5, when the setting means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means, the setting means is said to have the number of waiting times stored in the storage means based on a predetermined condition. The gaming machine 6 is characterized in that, in each of the first effects, the second effect is set to be feasible in addition to the first effect.

The predetermined conditions may be determined based on random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. For example, on the condition that it is determined that the transition to the gaming state that gives the player a predetermined game value is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, the second effect is performed in addition to the first effect. It may be set to be feasible. Further, the predetermined conditions may be determined based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. For example, as the first aspect of the effect, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is a part of a predetermined combination of the identification information. When the expected mode (reach mode) constituting the above is included, the second effect is set to be feasible in addition to the first effect, provided that the first effect selected by the selection means is the expected mode. You may. In these cases, the content related to the random information acquired by the acquisition means and the content related to the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means are the main control means together with the permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect. May be notified to the sub-control means. In this case, these contents may be included in the permission command and notified, or may be notified by using a command different from the permission command.

Further, the predetermined condition may be determined based on the number of times of waiting for the first effect stored in the storage means. For example, the second effect may be set to be executable in addition to the first effect, provided that the number of waits for the first effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times. Further, the predetermined conditions may be determined by a combination of these conditions, or may be indicated by a predetermined probability.

According to the game machine 6, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means is received, in each of the first productions for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means based on a predetermined condition, the first effect is performed. It is set by the setting means so that the second effect is performed in addition to the effect of 1. As a result, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, it can be suggested to the player that the predetermined conditions are satisfied. It is possible to give a person a sense of expectation for a predetermined condition.

In any of the game machines 1 to 6, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means is received, the setting means sets the second effect so that it can be executed with a predetermined probability. The gaming machine 7 is provided with a first changing means for changing the predetermined probability according to the number of times of waiting stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine 7, the second effect is executably set by the setting means with a predetermined probability of being changed by the first changing means according to the number of times of waiting stored in the storage means. Here, since the second effect is performed corresponding to the first effect corresponding to the number of waiting times stored in the storage means, for example, if the predetermined probability is set higher as the number of times of waiting is larger, the second effect can be obtained. When the effect is set to be feasible, there is a high possibility that the number of consecutive times of the second effect will increase. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect is continuously performed, so that the effect different from the normal effect is performed, so that the player has a special expectation. Can be given.

In any of the game machines 1 to 7, when the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means is received, the setting means is set so that the second effect can be executed with a predetermined probability. The gaming machine 8 is provided with a second changing means for changing the predetermined probability based on random information acquired by the acquiring means when the detection means detects the establishment of the starting condition.

In this case, the content related to the random information acquired by the acquisition means may be notified from the main control means to the sub-control means together with the permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect. At this time, the content related to the random information acquired by the acquisition means may be included in the permission command and notified, or may be notified by using a command different from the permission command.

According to the game machine 8, when the detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied, the second effect is executed with a predetermined probability of being changed by the second changing means based on the random information acquired by the acquiring means. It is set by the setting means as possible. As a result, for example, based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, a predetermined game machine value is given to a predetermined probability when it is determined that the transition to the game state in which the player is given a predetermined game value is performed. If it is made larger than the predetermined probability when it is determined that the transition to the gaming state to be performed is not performed, if the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the standby is performed. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the gaming state of the gaming machine will transition to the gaming state that gives the player a predetermined gaming value after the final first production. .. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a high expectation.

In the game machine 8, the second changing means changes the predetermined probability according to the mode of the first effect selected by the selecting means based on the random information acquired by the acquiring means. A game machine 9 characterized by being.

The first aspect of the effect is, for example, in the dynamic display of identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display, and the stopped identification information is a combination of predetermined identification information. A so-called "normal reach" mode, which is a partially expected mode, and a so-called "completely deviated" mode, which is a normal mode in which a display result other than a combination of predetermined identification information is displayed without the expected mode. Further, although the probability of being selected is lower than the above-mentioned expected mode, the result of the lottery reveals a combination of identification information predetermined in the first production. It may include a so-called "super reach" mode or a "special reach" mode, which is a special expected mode in which the probability of being selected in a certain case is high.

According to the game machine 9, the second effect is executably set by the setting means with a predetermined probability of being changed by the second changing means according to the mode of the first effect selected by the selecting means. As a result, for example, in the first mode of the effect selected by the selection means, in the dynamic display of the identification information, a part of the identification information is stopped in the middle of the dynamic display and the stopped identification information is preliminarily displayed. When it is a normal mode in which a predetermined probability in the case of an expected mode forming a part of a predetermined combination of identification information is displayed without a predetermined combination of identification information other than the predetermined combination of identification information. If it is set higher than the predetermined probability of, when the second effect is performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the mode of the last first effect that has been waiting is the expected mode. It is possible to suggest to the player that the probability is high. Here, the expected mode is that there is a possibility of a combination of predetermined identification information when all the identification information is stopped, that is, a game in which the gaming state of the gaming machine gives the player a predetermined gaming value. This is an aspect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of transition to the state. Therefore, when the second effect is continuously performed together with all the first effects that have been waiting, the expectation of the player can be increased.

In any of the game machines 1 to 9, the second effect is to perform a series of related effects in correspondence with each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. A game machine 10 characterized by being.

According to the game machine 10, the second effect is to perform a series of related effects corresponding to each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. Each time a series of related productions progresses, the player can have a higher expectation.

In any of the game machines 1 to 9, the second effect is the same effect corresponding to each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. Characteristic gaming machine 11.

According to the game machine 11, the second effect is the same effect corresponding to each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means, so that the same effect is repeated. Each time it is played, the player can have a higher expectation.

In any of the game machines 1 to 11, the setting means receives the permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means, and the first effect of the number of times of waiting stored in the storage means is achieved. In each case, the second effect is executably set in accordance with the stop of the first effect, and the second effect executing means is the second effect to which the second effect is added by the setting means. The gaming machine 12 is characterized in that, when the effect of 1 is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed in accordance with the stop of the first effect.

According to the game machine 12, when the permission command transmitted from the main control means is received in the sub control means, the first effect is performed in each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. The second effect can be executed according to the stop of the sub-control means, and is set by the setting means of the sub-control means. Then, when the first effect to which the second effect is added is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in accordance with the stop of the first effect. To. As a result, even if the combination of identification information that appears when the first effect is stopped is other than the combination of the predetermined identification information and the predetermined game value is not given, the second effect is produced. By performing the above, it is possible to give the player a predetermined sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that does not make the player bored.

In the game machine 12, the second effect executing means executes the second effect by stopping the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means by a predetermined method. A game machine 13 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine 13, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means by stopping the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means by a predetermined method. Here, the predetermined method may be a method of stopping the dynamically displayed identification information in an order different from the normal stop order, or a method of stopping all the identification information at the same time. Normally, the player pays attention to the dynamic display of the identification information and plays the game. However, if the player executes the second effect by stopping the identification information by a predetermined method different from the usual method, the player is given a second effect. Therefore, it is possible to instantly recognize that the second effect has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to instantly give the player a predetermined sense of expectation.

In the game machine 12 or 13, the second effect executing means emits a predetermined stop sound when the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped, thereby causing the second effect. A game machine 14 characterized in that it executes a production.

According to the game machine 14, when the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped, a predetermined stop sound is generated, so that the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means. To. Here, the predetermined stop sound may be a type of stop sound different from the stop sound normally emitted when the dynamically displayed identification information is stopped, or the normally emitted stop sound may be emitted. It may emit a stop sound at a volume or pitch different from that of. Normally, the player pays attention to the dynamic display of the identification information and plays the game, but by performing the second effect by a "sound" different from the dynamic display of the identification information, the player is given a second effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that an unusual production has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation.

In any of the game machines 12 to 14, the second effect executing means causes the identification information of a predetermined combination to appear after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped. 15. The gaming machine 15 is characterized in that the second effect is executed.

According to the game machine 15, after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped, the identification information of a predetermined combination is displayed, so that the second effect is produced by the second effect executing means. Will be executed. Normally, the player pays attention to the dynamic display of the identification information and plays the game. Therefore, by performing the second effect using the identification information that appears after the dynamic display is stopped, the player is given a second effect. It is possible to easily recognize that the second effect has been performed. The "chance eye" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "identification information of a predetermined combination".

In any of the game machines 1 to 15, the game state of the game machine includes a high probability state in which the identification information of the predetermined combination appears with a higher probability than usual in the first effect. The main control means suggests that the game state is the high probability state by the state information setting means for setting information regarding whether or not the game state is the high probability state and the state information setting means. When the information is set, it is provided with a determination control means for not executing the determination of whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means, or for controlling so as to simply perform the determination. Characteristic gaming machine 16.

According to the game machine 16, the game state of the game machine includes a high probability state in which the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appears with a higher probability than usual, and the main control means includes. Information regarding whether or not the game state is a high probability state is set in the state information setting means. Then, when the information suggesting that the gaming state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means by the control by the determination control means. Is either unexecuted or simply done. On the other hand, in the main control means, the mode of the first effect is selected based on the random information acquired according to the establishment of the start condition, and the combination of the identification information predetermined in the first effect appears. By doing so, the player is given a predetermined game value. As described above, the main control means also performs an important process in the game machine, that is, giving a predetermined game value to the player. Here, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is a high probability state, in the main control means, the first effect is such that the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appears with a higher probability than usual. The mode is selected by the selection means, but in general, a large load is required for the selection process, and the time required for the process is very long. Then, in such a situation, if the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect, the processing load on the main control means further increases, and the process of selecting the mode of the first effect. However, there is a risk that it will not be completed within the specified time. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 16, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a high probability state, the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect by the determining means is not executed or simply performed. Therefore, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be omitted or shortened. Therefore, it is possible to complete the process within a predetermined time while surely performing the selection process of the first aspect of the effect by the selection means, which is an important process in the process in the game machine.

In the game machine 16, the main control means determines whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of one or more predetermined first predetermined information. As the lottery means for selecting whether or not to display the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means, and the first predetermined information used by the lottery means. The gaming machine 17 is characterized in that when the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the high probability state, it is provided with a determination information setting means for setting more information than in the normal state. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "first predetermined information".

According to the game machine 17, the mode is determined by the selection means by determining whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of one or more predetermined first predetermined information. Is selected by a lottery means whether or not the identification information of the predetermined combination is displayed in the first effect. Further, as for the predetermined first predetermined information used by the lottery means, when the game state of the game machine is in the high probability state, more information than usual is set by the determination information setting means. As a result, the lottery means can make the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appear with a higher probability than usual, so that a high probability state can be easily created as the game state of the game machine. it can. On the other hand, in a situation where the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a high probability state, the number of predetermined first predetermined information is set to be larger than usual, so that a large amount of random information acquired by the acquisition means is used. It is necessary to perform a lottery while comparing each of the first predetermined information of the above, and the time required for the processing becomes very long. Then, in such a situation, if the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect, the processing load on the main control means further increases, and the process of selecting the mode of the first effect. However, there is a risk that it will not be completed within the specified time. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 17, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a high probability state, the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect by the determining means is not executed or simply performed. Therefore, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be omitted or shortened. Therefore, it is possible to complete the process within a predetermined time while surely performing the selection process of the first aspect of the effect by the selection means, which is an important process in the process in the game machine.

In the game machine 16 or 17, when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, the determination means obtains the random information acquired by the acquisition means at least one predetermined second predetermined value. It is determined whether or not to perform the second effect depending on whether or not it matches one of the information, and the main control means is a plurality of the firsts used in the determination means. 2 A first determination information storage means for storing information for specifying predetermined information, and a second predetermined information of a part of a plurality of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination storage means. The determination control means is provided with a second determination information storage means for storing information for specifying the above, and the determination control means normally uses the first determination information storage means as one or more of the second predetermined information used in the determination means. When a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in is selected and information suggesting that the gaming state is the high probability state is set by the state information setting means, the first 2. A gaming machine characterized in that by switching to a part of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the determination information storage means, the determination by the determination means is controlled so as to be simplified. 18. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "second predetermined information".

According to the game machine 18, whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition matches one of one or more predetermined second predetermined information. Depending on the situation, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means. The second predetermined information may be the same as the first predetermined information described in the game machine 17, or may be different. In this way, in the determination means, it is determined whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one or more of the second predetermined information. Therefore, when a large amount of the second predetermined information exists. , Random information must be compared with each of the many second predetermined information, and the processing time becomes very long. Therefore, the processing load on the main control means is further increased, and there is a possibility that the selection process of the first aspect of the effect, which is an important process in the main control means, may not be completed within a predetermined time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 18, in the main control means, the information for identifying the plurality of second predetermined information used in the determination means is stored in the first determination information storage means, and the plurality of second information is stored in the first determination information storage means. Information that identifies a part of the predetermined information is stored in the second determination information storage means. Then, as one or more second predetermined information used in the determination means, a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means is normally selected, while state information. When information suggesting that the gaming state is a high probability state is set by the setting means, the information is switched to a part of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the second determination information storage means. The determination control means is controlled so that the determination by the determination means is simply performed. As a result, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be shortened, so that the selection process of the first effect mode by the selection means, which is an important process in the processing in the game machine, is surely performed, and a predetermined time is determined. The process can be completed in time. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, a plurality of information used when determining a predetermined state based on random information in the determination means is specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means. By simply switching from the second predetermined information of the above to a part of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the second determination information storage means, the determination by the determination means is controlled so as to be easily performed. , The control can be performed easily and surely.

In the game machine 16 or 17, when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, the random information acquired by the acquisition means is one or more predetermined second predetermined values. It is determined whether or not to perform the second effect depending on whether or not it matches one of the information, and the main control means is a plurality of the firsts used in the determination means. (2) A first determination information storage means for storing information for specifying predetermined information is provided, and the determination control means normally uses the first determination information as one or more of the second predetermined information used in the determination means. When all the plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the storage means is selected, and the information suggesting that the gaming state is the high probability state is set by the state information setting means. By selecting a part of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means, it is controlled so that the determination by the determination means can be easily performed. A game machine 19 characterized by being present. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "second predetermined information".

According to the game machine 19, whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition matches one of one or more predetermined second predetermined information. Depending on the situation, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means. The second predetermined information may be the same as the first predetermined information described in the game machine 17, or may be different. In this way, in the determination means, it is determined whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one or more of the second predetermined information. Therefore, when a large amount of the second predetermined information exists. , Random information must be compared with each of the many second predetermined information, and the processing time becomes very long. Therefore, there is a risk that the process of selecting the mode of the main production will not be completed within a predetermined time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 19, in the main control means, information for identifying a plurality of second predetermined information used in the determination means is stored in the first determination information storage means, and is used in the determination means. As one or more second predetermined information, all of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means are normally selected, while the game state is selected by the state information setting means. When information suggesting that is in a high probability state is set, a part of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means is selected. Then, the determination control means is controlled so that the determination by the determination means is simply performed. As a result, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be shortened, so that the selection process of the first effect mode by the selection means, which is an important process in the processing in the game machine, is surely performed, and a predetermined time is determined. The process can be completed in time. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means as the second predetermined information used when the determination means determines the predetermined state based on random information. By selecting only a part of the second predetermined information from the plurality of second predetermined information to be performed, the determination by the determination means is controlled so as to be easily performed, so that the determination means is based on random information. It is not necessary to provide a separate storage means in order to easily determine the predetermined state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

In the game machine 18 or 19, the determination means uses the first predetermined information used for determining whether or not to reveal a combination of identification information predetermined in the first effect. The first predetermined information is used as information, and when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of the first predetermined information. It is determined whether or not to perform the second effect based on whether or not a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the effect, and the first determination information storage means together with the determination means. It is used in the lottery means that the information that identifies the first predetermined information that is determined that the first effect of the random information reveals a combination of predetermined identification information is stored. Characteristic gaming machine 20.

According to the game machine 20, when the detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied, the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of the first predetermined information, so that the information is predetermined in the first effect. Whether or not to perform the second effect is determined by the determination means based on whether or not the combination of the identification information appears. Further, among the random information, the information that identifies the first predetermined information that is determined that the first effect reveals a combination of the predetermined identification information is stored in the first determination information storage means and is specified here. The first predetermined information is used in the lottery means together with the determination means. As a result, in the lottery means, based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means, whether or not to make the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appear is drawn, and in the determination means, the acquisition When determining whether or not to perform the second effect based on whether or not the first effect executed based on the random information acquired by the means reveals a combination of predetermined identification information. Then, the lottery or the determination can be performed using the first predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide separate storage means for the lottery process by the lottery means and the determination process by the determination means, so that the increase in the storage capacity can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines 1 to 15, the game state of the game machine includes a high probability state in which the identification information of the predetermined combination appears with a higher probability than usual in the first effect. The main control means can execute a periodic process to be executed periodically, and the periodic process controls the start of execution of the first effect waiting to be executed by the first effect executing means. 1 Whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition and the effect start process. The first effect start process includes whether or not the game state is the high probability state based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means, including the second effect determination process for controlling the determination of. Correspondingly, the main control means includes the lottery process of lottery whether or not to display the identification information of the predetermined combination in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means, and the main control means is the gaming state. When the state information setting means for setting information regarding whether or not is in the high probability state and the information suggesting that the gaming state is the high probability state are set by the state information setting means, The gaming machine 21 is characterized in that the second effect determination process is not executed or the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process.

According to the game machine 21, periodic processing is periodically executed by the main control means, and in each periodic processing, the execution start of the first effect waiting to be executed by the first effect execution means is controlled. 1. The effect start process, and when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, the determination of whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means is controlled based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. 2 The effect determination process is executed. Further, as the game state of the game machine, a high probability state in which the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appears with a higher probability than usual is included, and is included in the first effect start process. A combination of predetermined combinations in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means according to whether or not the game state is a high probability state based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means by the lottery process. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to reveal the identification information. On the other hand, when the information regarding whether or not the game state is a high probability state is set in the state information setting means, and the information suggesting that the game state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, the information is set. , The execution of the second effect determination process is not executed by the second effect determination process changing means, or the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process. Here, the lottery process executed in the first effect start process identifies a predetermined combination in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means when the game state of the game machine is in a high probability state. The lottery is performed so that the information appears with a higher probability than usual, but when the first aspect of the production is drawn in a high probability state, a large load is generally required for the lottery process. The processing time will be very long. On the other hand, the determination by the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process, that is, the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect also takes time in the second effect determination process if the determination conditions are complicated. .. Therefore, when the first effect start process and the second effect determination process are executed in the periodic process executed at one timing, one of the processes is performed in the time interval in which the periodic process is executed. There is a risk that it will not end. On the other hand, according to the game machine 21, when the information suggesting that the game state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, the second effect determination process changing means determines the second effect. Since the execution of the process is not executed or the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process, the time required for the second effect determination process can be saved or kept short. Therefore, it is possible to complete one periodic process within the time interval in which the periodic process is executed while surely performing the first effect start process, which is an important process in the process in the game machine.

In the game machine 21, the lottery process determines whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of one or more predetermined first predetermined information. In the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the identification information of the predetermined combination, and the main control means is used in the lottery process. As the first predetermined information, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the high probability state, the gaming machine 22 is provided with a determination information setting means for setting more information than in the normal state. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "first predetermined information".

According to the game machine 22, the mode is determined by the selection means by determining whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of one or more predetermined first predetermined information. Is selected by a lottery process whether or not the identification information of the predetermined combination is displayed in the first effect. Further, as for the predetermined first predetermined information used in the lottery process, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is in the high probability state, more information than usual is set by the determination information setting means. As a result, by the lottery process, the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect can be displayed with a higher probability than usual, so that a high probability state can be easily created as the game state of the game machine. it can. On the other hand, in a situation where the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a high probability state, the number of predetermined first predetermined information is set to be larger than usual, so that a large amount of random information acquired by the acquisition means is used. It is necessary to perform a lottery while comparing each of the first predetermined information of the above, and the time required for the processing becomes very long. Then, in such a situation, if the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect, the processing load on the main control means further increases, and the process of selecting the mode of the first effect. And, there is a possibility that the process of determining whether or not to perform the second effect does not end within the time interval in which the periodic process is executed. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 21, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is in a high probability state, the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect by the determining means is not executed or simply performed. Therefore, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be omitted or shortened. Therefore, it is possible to complete one periodic process within the time interval in which the periodic process is executed while surely performing the first effect start process, which is an important process in the process in the game machine.

In the game machine 21 or 22, the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process receives the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. It is determined whether or not to perform the second effect according to whether or not it matches one or more of one or more predetermined second predetermined information, and the main control means is the determination. A first determination information storage means for storing information for specifying a plurality of the second predetermined information used in the means, and a plurality of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination storage means. The second determination information storage means for storing information for specifying a part of the second predetermined information is provided, and the second effect determination process changing means is one or more of the second predetermined items used in the determination means. As information, a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means is normally selected, and the state information setting means indicates that the gaming state is the high probability state. When the suggestive information is set, the second effect determination process is simplified by switching to a part of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the second determination information storage means. The gaming machine 23, which is characterized in that it is changed to. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "second predetermined information".

According to the game machine 23, whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition matches one of one or more predetermined second predetermined information. Depending on the situation, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means. The second predetermined information may be the same as or different from the first predetermined information described in the game machine 22. In this way, in the determination means, it is determined whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one or more of the second predetermined information. Therefore, when a large amount of the second predetermined information exists. , Random information must be compared with each of the many second predetermined information, and the processing time becomes very long. Therefore, the processing load on the main control means is further increased, and there is a possibility that the selection process of the first aspect of the effect, which is an important process in the main control means, may not be completed within a predetermined time.

On the other hand, according to the game machine 23, in the main control means, information for identifying a plurality of second predetermined information used in the determination means is stored in the first determination information storage means, and the plurality of second information is stored in the first determination information storage means. Information that identifies a part of the predetermined information is stored in the second determination information storage means. Then, as one or more second predetermined information used in the determination means, a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means is normally selected, while state information. When information suggesting that the gaming state is a high probability state is set by the setting means, the information is switched to a part of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the second determination information storage means. The second effect determination process is changed to a simple process by the second effect determination process changing means. As a result, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be shortened, so that the selection process of the first effect mode by the selection means, which is an important process in the processing in the game machine, is surely performed, and a predetermined time is determined. The process can be completed in time. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, a plurality of information used when determining a predetermined state based on random information in the determination means is specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means. The second effect determination process is changed to a simple process simply by switching from the second predetermined information of the above to a part of the second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the second determination information storage means. The change can be made easily and reliably.

In the game machine 21 or 22, the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process receives the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. It is determined whether or not to perform the second effect according to whether or not it matches with one of one or more predetermined second predetermined information, and the main control means is the determination. The second determination information storage means for storing a plurality of information for specifying the second predetermined information used in the means is provided, and the second effect determination process changing means is one or more of the first determination means used in the determination means. 2 As the predetermined information, all of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means are normally selected, and the game state is set to the high probability state by the state information setting means. When the information suggesting the existence is set, the second predetermined information is selected by selecting a part of the plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means. The gaming machine 24, characterized in that the effect determination process is changed to a simple process. The "value of a random number that becomes a big hit" (hit value) described in the above embodiment corresponds to the above "second predetermined information".

According to the game machine 24, whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition matches one of one or more predetermined second predetermined information. Depending on the situation, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means. The second predetermined information may be the same as or different from the first predetermined information described in the game machine 22. In this way, in the determination means, it is determined whether or not the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one or more of the second predetermined information. Therefore, when a large amount of the second predetermined information exists. , Random information must be compared with each of the many second predetermined information, and the processing time becomes very long. Therefore, the processing load on the main control means is further increased, and there is a possibility that the selection process of the first aspect of the effect, which is an important process in the main control means, may not be completed within a predetermined time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine 24, in the main control means, information for identifying a plurality of second predetermined information used in the determination means is stored in the first determination information storage means and is used in the determination means. As one or more second predetermined information, all of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means are normally selected, while the game state is selected by the state information setting means. When information suggesting that is in a high probability state is set, a part of a plurality of second predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means is selected. , The second effect determination process is changed to a simple process by the second effect determination process changing means. As a result, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be shortened, so that the selection process of the first effect mode by the selection means, which is an important process in the processing in the game machine, is surely performed, and a predetermined time is determined. The process can be completed in time. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, a plurality of information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means as information used when determining a predetermined state based on random information in the determination means. By selecting only a part of the second predetermined information from the second predetermined information of the above, the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process, and therefore the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process. In order to easily determine a predetermined state based on random information, it is not necessary to provide a separate storage means, and an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the game machine 23 or 24, the first effect determination process is used to determine whether or not a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the first effect by the lottery process. When the predetermined information is used as the second predetermined information and the detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied, the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of the first predetermined information. By doing so, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect based on whether or not a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the first effect, and the first determination information The storage means is used in the lottery process together with the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process, and it is determined that the first effect of the random information reveals a combination of predetermined identification information. 25. The gaming machine 25 is characterized in that it stores information that identifies the first predetermined information.

According to the game machine 25, when the detection means detects that the start condition is satisfied, the random information acquired by the acquisition means matches one of the first predetermined information, so that the information is predetermined in the first effect. Whether or not to perform the second effect is determined by the determination means based on whether or not the combination of the identification information appears. Further, among the random information, the information that identifies the first predetermined information that is determined that the first effect reveals a combination of the predetermined identification information is stored in the first determination information storage means and is specified here. The first predetermined information is used in the lottery process together with the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process. As a result, in the lottery process, based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means, whether or not to display the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect is drawn, and in the determination means, the acquisition When determining whether or not to perform the second effect based on whether or not the first effect executed based on the random information acquired by the means reveals a combination of predetermined identification information. Then, the lottery or the determination can be performed using the first predetermined information specified by the information stored in the first determination information storage means. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide separate storage means for the lottery process executed in the first effect start process and the second effect determination process, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity.

In any of the game machines 1 to 25, the waiting number acquisition means for acquiring the waiting number of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means and the waiting number acquired by the waiting number acquiring means are used. A command generation means for generating a wait count command based on the command is provided, and the permission transmission means generates the wait count command generated by the command generation means when it is determined by the determination means to perform the second effect. 26. The gaming machine 26 is characterized in that it includes permission information for permitting execution of the second effect, and then transmits the waiting count command as the permission command to the sub-control means.

According to the game machine 26, the waiting number of the first effect executed by the first effect executing means is acquired by the waiting number acquiring means, and the waiting number command is generated based on the acquired waiting number. Then, when the determination means determines that the second effect is to be performed, the permission transmission means includes the permission information for permitting the execution of the second effect in the wait count command, and then the wait count command is issued. It is sent to the sub-control means as an authorization command. As a result, in the sub-control means, in addition to being able to accurately grasp the permission information permitting the execution of the second effect, the first effect execution means to which the second effect is added is waiting for execution. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of waiting times for the production. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the control as compared with the case where the waiting number of the first effect and the permission information are transmitted from the main control means to the sub control means by another command.

27. In any of the gaming machines 1 to 26, the gaming machine 27 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A game machine 28 according to any one of the game machines 1 to 26, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and when the stop is performed. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A game machine 29, wherein in any one of the game machines 1 to 26, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects are displayed on display devices such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of games. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters (wins) a ball at the entry port (starting opening). For example, three horizontal or vertical balls in the effective display area, or a total of 3 × 3 squares. Nine symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. It causes a big hit in some cases.
In addition, while scrolling a symbol or the like, there is a higher probability than usual that the player will be in a favorable gaming state (for example, a big hit) in advance, which is an interesting effect (for example, an effect by reach display). Is carried out, and a device is made to give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous game. The effect of the reach display is, for example, to stop the symbol rows of the left and right two rows of the three rows of symbols being scrolled at a predetermined symbol, and then scroll the symbol row of the middle one row at a low speed. On the other hand, it is an effect that gives a feeling of expectation to stop with a predetermined combination of stop symbols. The effect of the reach display is performed for a longer time than the normal variable effect (variable effect without the reach display) in order to give the player a higher expectation. In general, the pattern of the hobby production is selected together with the lottery for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot that is performed at the time of the starting prize.
By the way, as a pattern of entertainment production, a gaming machine is known that suggests a transition to an advantageous gaming state by a production (hereinafter, referred to as "continuous notice production") that continuously executes a transition to an advantageous gaming state over a plurality of variable productions. (For example, Patent Document 1: Real Kaihei 7-24383). When the pattern of the hobby effect is confirmed at the time of the start winning, this continuous notice effect is performed by adding a reach display to all the variable effects that have been waiting before the determination. The continuous advance notice effect is intended to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation for a game state that is advantageous to the player over a plurality of variable effects instead of one variable effect.
However, in the conventional game machine that performs the continuous advance notice effect, when the main control device that executes the lottery at the time of starting prize executes the continuous advance notice effect and decides to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the main control device waits. Since the process of setting the mode of the continuous advance notice effect such as adding the reach display to all the variable effects that have been performed is performed, the load related to the process may increase in the main control device. On the other hand, in the main control device, in order to prevent delays and malfunctions in the lottery process, it is required to keep the processing load small, so that there is a problem that it is difficult to continuously perform the advance notice effect in various modes.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and is a gaming machine capable of continuously performing an effect that gives a player a predetermined sense of expectation in various aspects. Is intended to provide.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 acquires a detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition and random information when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. To the main control means having the acquisition means and the selection means for selecting the mode of the first effect which is the dynamic display of the identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the instruction from the main control means. Correspondingly, it is provided with an auxiliary control means having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means, and is executed by the first effect executing means. When a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the first effect, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the main control means is the same as the first effect. The determination means for determining whether or not to perform another second effect, and the permission command for permitting the execution of the second effect when the determination means determines that the second effect is to be performed are described above. The sub-control means includes a permission transmitting means for transmitting to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means includes a storage means for storing the number of times of waiting for the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, and the permission transmitting means. In each of the first effects for the number of waits stored in the storage means, within the time allotted for the execution of the first effect, based on receiving the permission command transmitted by In addition to the first effect, the setting means for setting the second effect to be feasible, and the first effect to which the second effect is added by the setting means are executed by the first effect executing means. In this case, a second effect executing means for executing the second effect is provided.
The game machine of the technical idea 2 is the game machine described in the technical idea 1, and the setting means is a standby stored in the storage means based on receiving a permission command transmitted by the permission transmission means. In each of the first effects for the number of times, the second effect is executably set according to the stop of the first effect, and the second effect execution means is said by the setting means. When the first effect to which the second effect is added is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed in accordance with the stop of the first effect.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2. The second effect executing means is predetermined after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped. The second effect is executed by displaying the identification information of the combination.
In the game machine according to the technical idea 4, the identification information of the predetermined combination in the first production is higher than usual as the game state of the game machine in the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3. The main control means includes a high-probability state that appears with a probability, and the main control means is provided with a state information setting means for setting information regarding whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability state, and the state information setting means. When the information suggesting that the game state is the high probability state is set, the determination of whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means is not executed, or is simplified. It is provided with a determination control means for controlling the operation.
In the game machine according to the technical idea 5, the identification information of the predetermined combination in the first production is higher than usual as the game state of the game machine in the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3. It includes a high-probability state that appears with a probability, and the main control means can execute a periodic process that is periodically executed, and the periodic process is waiting to be executed by the first effect executing means. Based on the first effect start process that controls the execution start of the first effect, and the random information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition. The first effect start process includes a second effect determination process for controlling the determination of whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means, and the first effect start process is based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. Depending on whether or not the gaming state is the high-probability state, a lottery is drawn to determine whether or not to display the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect whose mode is selected by the selection means. The main control means includes a lottery process, and the main control means includes a state information setting means for setting information regarding whether or not the game state is the high probability state, and the state information setting means for the game state to be in the high probability state. When the information suggesting that there is information is set, the second effect determination process is not executed, or the second effect determination process change means for changing to a simple process is provided. ..
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the first mode of production is the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition in the main control means. Is selected by. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect executing means as the first effect in the selected mode. Further, in the main control means, whether or not to perform a second effect different from the first effect is determined by the determination means, and as a result, when it is determined to perform the second effect, the second effect is performed. The permission command for permitting the execution of the effect of is transmitted to the sub control means by the permission transmission means of the main control means. On the other hand, when the establishment of the start condition is detected in the main control means, the first effect corresponding to the establishment of the start condition detected in the past is being executed by the first effect execution means of the sub control means. The first effect corresponding to the establishment of the detected start condition is waited for, and the number of times of waiting is stored in the storage means provided in the sub control means. Then, when the permission command transmitted from the main control means is received in the sub control means, it is assigned to the execution of the first effect in each of the first effects for the number of waiting times stored in the storage means. In the time, the second effect can be executed in addition to the first effect, the first effect is set by the setting means of the sub-control means, and the second effect is added to the first effect. When executed by the effect executing means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.
As a result, for example, when it is determined that the transition to the game state in which the player is given a predetermined game value is performed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied, the determination means of the main control means. If it is determined that the second effect is to be performed by the sub-control means, each time the first effect that has been waiting when the start condition is satisfied is executed by the first effect execution means, the second effect is performed. In addition to the first effect, the second effect can be executed by the second effect executing means. Therefore, if the second effect is continuously executed together with the first effect, after all the waiting first effects are completed, the game state of the game machine is changed to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to transition to a game state that gives a predetermined game value.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the permission command transmitted from the main control means is received in the sub control means, it is stored in the storage means. In each of the first effects corresponding to the number of waiting times, the second effect can be executed according to the stop of the first effect, and is set by the setting means of the sub-control means. Then, when the first effect to which the second effect is added is executed by the first effect executing means, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means in accordance with the stop of the first effect. To. As a result, even if the combination of identification information that appears when the first effect is stopped is other than the combination of the predetermined identification information and the predetermined game value is not given, the second effect is produced. By performing the above, it is possible to give the player a predetermined sense of expectation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to perform an effect that does not make the player bored.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 2, the identification of a predetermined combination is performed after the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the first effect executing means is stopped. By displaying the information, the second effect is executed by the second effect execution means. Normally, the player pays attention to the dynamic display of the identification information and plays the game. Therefore, by performing the second effect using the identification information that appears after the dynamic display is stopped, the player is given a second effect. This has the effect of making it easy to recognize that the second effect has been performed.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3, the game state of the gaming machine is identified as a combination predetermined in the first production. A high-probability state in which information appears with a higher probability than usual is included, and in the main control means, information regarding whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability state is set in the state information setting means. Then, when the information suggesting that the gaming state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, it is determined whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means by the control by the determination control means. Is either unexecuted or simply done. On the other hand, in the main control means, the mode of the first effect is selected based on the random information acquired according to the establishment of the start condition, and the combination of the identification information predetermined in the first effect appears. By doing so, the player is given a predetermined game value. As described above, the main control means also performs an important process in the game machine, that is, giving a predetermined game value to the player. Here, when the gaming state of the gaming machine is a high probability state, in the main control means, the first effect is such that the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appears with a higher probability than usual. The mode is selected by the selection means, but in general, a large load is required for the selection process, and the time required for the process is very long. Then, in such a situation, if the determination means determines whether or not to perform the second effect, the processing load on the main control means further increases, and the process of selecting the mode of the first effect. However, there is a risk that it will not be completed within the specified time. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, if the gaming state of the gaming machine is a high probability state, it is determined whether or not the second effect is to be performed by the determining means. Since it is performed simply, the time required for the determination process by the determination means can be omitted or kept short. Therefore, there is an effect that the process can be completed within a predetermined time while surely performing the selection process of the first aspect of the effect by the selection means, which is an important process in the process in the game machine.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3, periodic processing is periodically executed by the main control means, and in each periodic processing. Then, when the first effect start process for controlling the execution start of the first effect waiting for execution by the first effect execution means and the detection means detect the establishment of the start condition, the acquisition means acquires the first effect. A second effect determination process that controls the determination of whether or not to perform the second effect by the determination means is executed based on random information. Further, as the game state of the game machine, a high probability state in which the identification information of the combination predetermined in the first effect appears with a higher probability than usual is included, and is included in the first effect start process. A combination of predetermined combinations in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means according to whether or not the game state is a high probability state based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means by the lottery process. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to reveal the identification information. On the other hand, when the information regarding whether or not the game state is a high probability state is set in the state information setting means, and the information suggesting that the game state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, the information is set. , The execution of the second effect determination process is not executed by the second effect determination process changing means, or the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process. Here, the lottery process executed in the first effect start process identifies a predetermined combination in the first effect in which the mode is selected by the selection means when the game state of the game machine is in a high probability state. The lottery is performed so that the information appears with a higher probability than usual, but when the first aspect of the production is drawn in a high probability state, a large load is generally required for the lottery process. The processing time will be very long. On the other hand, the determination by the determination means controlled by the second effect determination process, that is, the determination as to whether or not to perform the second effect also takes time in the second effect determination process if the determination conditions are complicated. .. Therefore, when the first effect start process and the second effect determination process are executed in the periodic process executed at one timing, one of the processes is performed in the time interval in which the periodic process is executed. There is a risk that it will not end. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, when the information suggesting that the gaming state is a high probability state is set by the state information setting means, the second effect determination processing changing means is used. , The execution of the second effect determination process is not executed, or the second effect determination process is changed to a simple process, so that the time required for the second effect determination process is omitted or kept short. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that one periodical process can be completed within the time interval in which the periodical process is executed while surely performing the first effect start process, which is an important process in the game machine. ..

110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (secondary control means)
202b High probability jackpot random number table (first judgment information storage means)
202c Simple high-probability jackpot random number table (second judgment information storage means)
223a Hold count counter (storage means)
S105 (detection means)
S106 Probability change setting process (state information setting means)
S206 Fluctuation start processing (first production start processing)
S301 to S303 (judgment information setting means)
S304 (lottery means, lottery process)
S311, S313 (selection means)
S404 (acquisition means)
S407 to S409 (determination control means, second effect determination processing changing means)
S410, S411, S418, S419 (second effect determination process, determination means)
S413, S420 (permitted transmission means, part of command generation means)
S421 (Means for acquiring the number of waits, part of the command generation means)
S1009 Continuous notice judgment processing (setting means)
S1111-S1113 (second changing means)
S1114 (first changing means)
S1607 (1st effect execution means, 2nd effect execution means)

Claims (1)

A detection means for detecting the establishment of a predetermined start condition, an acquisition means for acquiring information when the detection means detects the establishment of the start condition, and identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Between the main control means having the selection means for selecting the type of dynamic display and the dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means, the main display means whose display is controlled by the main control means and the main display means. A sub-control means having a dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the type of the dynamic display of the identification information selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the control means. A gaming machine that imparts a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined combination of identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means.

Images